DCR-VX2000E - Camcorder SONY - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free DCR-VX2000E SONY in PDF.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Camcorder
📄 260 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question 10 questions ⚙️ Specs
Notice SONY DCR-VX2000E - page 156
View the manual : Français FR English EN Русский RU
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.
Product TypeMiniDV Digital Camcorder
BrandSony
ModelDCR-VX2000E
CategoryProfessional Consumer Camcorder
Recording FormatMiniDV (DV / DVCAM)
Sensor3 CCD sensors 1/3 inch (3CCD)
Recording Resolution720×576 pixels (PAL)
LensCarl Zeiss Vario-Sonnar T*
Focal Length (35mm equivalent)51 - 918 mm (in photo mode)
Optical Zoom18x
Digital Zoom48x / 72x (selectable)
Image StabilizerOptical (SteadyShot)
Dimensions (W × H × D)115 × 146 × 342 mm
Weight (body only)Approx. 1.4 kg
Weight (with battery and tape)Approx. 1.6 kg
Power Supply7.2V battery (NP-F330) or 8.4V AC adapter
Power Consumption4.1W (viewfinder) / 4.0W (LCD monitor)
Operating Temperature0°C to 40°C
Storage Temperature-20°C to 60°C
LCD Screen2.5 inches (6.2 cm) free-angle
ViewfinderColor electronic (0.44 inch)
Inputs/Outputsi.LINK (FireWire), S-Video, Composite, Audio RCA, External microphone, Headphone
Included AccessoriesNP-F330 Battery, charger, AV cable, i.LINK cable, remote control, eyecup

Frequently Asked Questions - DCR-VX2000E SONY

What is the battery life of the Sony DCR-VX2000E?
With a fully charged NP-F330 battery, the battery life is approximately 60 to 90 minutes under normal use (recording with LCD screen). To extend the time, use the viewfinder and turn off the stabilizer.
What type of tape does the DCR-VX2000E use?
This camcorder uses standard MiniDV tapes (DV format). It is compatible with DVCAM tapes for better quality, but in DVCAM mode the recording time is reduced.
How to transfer videos from the camcorder to a computer?
Use the i.LINK (FireWire) port with a 4-pin cable. Connect the camcorder to the computer and use DV capture software (e.g., Windows Movie Maker, iMovie). The camcorder must be in VCR mode.
Can I use a memory card with this camcorder?
No, the DCR-VX2000E does not have a memory card slot. It records exclusively on MiniDV tape. Photos are recorded on tape as still images.
How to clean the read/write heads?
Use a dry MiniDV cleaning tape. Insert it and play for about 10 seconds. Do not use wet cleaning as it could damage the heads. If the problem persists, consult a professional.
Is this camcorder compatible with external lighting or a microphone?
Yes, it has an accessory shoe and a stereo microphone jack (3.5mm mini-jack). You can attach an LED light or a directional microphone.
How to adjust white balance manually?
Press the MENU button, go to CAMERA SET > WHT BAL, then select ATW (auto) or ONE PUSH for manual adjustment. Point to a white surface and press the execute button.
Is nightshot mode (night vision) available?
Yes, the DCR-VX2000E has a NIGHTSHOT mode. Slide the switch to NIGHTSHOT. The built-in infrared allows shooting in total darkness (black and white).
How to connect the camcorder to a TV?
Use the included A/V cable (3.5mm jack to RCA). Plug yellow into video input and white/red into audio input. Set the TV to the correct source. You can also use the S-Video output.
What to do if the tape jams or the picture is jerky?
Stop the camcorder immediately and remove the tape. Check that the tape is not damaged. If the problem recurs, have the heads cleaned or check the transport mechanism. Avoid low-quality tapes.

User questions about DCR-VX2000E SONY

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

Your email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone answers your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Camcorder in PDF format for free! Find your manual DCR-VX2000E - SONY and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. DCR-VX2000E by SONY.

USER MANUAL DCR-VX2000E SONY

Digital Video Camera Recorder Mini DV Digital Video Cassette

Operating Instructions

Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly, and retain it for future reference.

Operating Instructions

Read this manual carefully and keep it for future reference.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Operating Instructions - 1

Digital Handycam

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Operating Instructions - 2

InfoLITHIUM

TM

SERIES

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Operating Instructions - 3

Cassette

Memory

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Operating Instructions - 4

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Operating Instructions - 5

MEMORY STICK TM

DCR-VX2000E

English

Welcome!

Congratulations on your purchase of this Sony Digital Handycam camcorder. With your Digital Handycam, you can capture life's precious moments with superior picture and sound quality. Your Digital Handycam is loaded with advanced features, but at the same time it is very easy to use. You will soon be producing home video that you can enjoy for years to come.

WARNING

To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture.

To avoid electrical shock, do not open the cabinet.

Refer servicing to qualified personnel only.

NOTICE ON THE SUPPLIED AC POWER ADAPTOR FOR CUSTOMERS IN THE UNITED KINGDOM

A moulded plug complying with BS1363 is fitted to this equipment for your safety and convenience.

Should the fuse in the plug supplied need to be replaced, a 5 AMP fuse approved by ASTA or BSI to BS 1362 (i.e., marked with or mark) must be used.

If the plug supplied with this equipment has a detachable fuse cover, be sure to attach the fuse cover after you change the fuse. Never use the plug without the fuse cover. If you should lose the fuse cover, please contact your nearest Sony service station.

For the customers in Europe ATTENTION

The electromagnetic fields at the specific frequencies may influence the picture and sound of this digital camcorder.

For the Customers in Germany

Directive: EMC Directive 89/336/EEC. 92/31/EEC

This equipment complies with the EMC regulations when used under the following circumstances:

Residential area Business district Light-industry district (This equipment complies with the EMC standard regulations EN55022 Class B.)

"Memory Stick"

Pysckii

Welcome!

We congratulate you on your purchase of the Sony Digital Handycam video camera. With the Digital Handycam video camera, you can capture your precious moments of life with superior picture and sound quality. The Digital Handycam video camera is equipped with advanced functions, but at the same time it is easy to use. Soon you will be creating family video programs that you can enjoy for years to come.

PRECAUTIONS

Checking supplied accessories 5

Quick Start Guide 6

Getting started

Using this manual. 10

Step 1 Preparing the power supply 13

Step 2 Inserting a cassette 20

Recording - Basics

Recording a picture 22

Shooting backlit subjects (BACK LIGHT) 32

Using the spot light function 33

Self-timer recording 34

Checking the recording - END SEARCH / EDITSEARCH / Rec Review 36

Playback - Basics

Playing back a tape 38

Viewing the recording on TV 44

Advanced Recording Operations

Recording a still image on a tape - Tape Photo recording 46

Shooting with all the pixels - PROG.SCAN 50

Using the guide frame 52

Using the wide mode 53

Using the fader function 54

Using special effects - Picture effect 56

Using special effects - Digital effect 58

Shooting with manual adjustment 61

Adjusting the white balance 70

Adjusting recording level manually - Sound recording level 73

Presetting the adjustment for picture quality - Custom preset 75

Using the PROGRAM AE function 77

Focusing manually 81

Interval recording 83

Frame by frame recording - Cut recording 87

Marking an Index 89

Advanced Playback Operations

Quickly locating a scene using the zero set memory function 91

Searching for a recording by index - Index search 93

Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title - Title search 95

Searching a recording by date - Date search 97

Searching for a photo - Photo search/Photo scan 99

Playing back a tape with picture effects 102

Playing back a tape with digital effects 103

Editing

Dubbing a tape 105

Dubbing only desired scenes - Digital program editing 108

Using with an analog video unit and a PC - Signal convert function 126

Recording video or TV programs 128

Inserting a scene from a VCR - Insert editing 132

Audio dubbing 135

Superimposing a title 141

Making your own titles 147

Labeling a cassette 149

Erasing the cassette memory data 151

Customizing Your Camcorder Changing the menu settings 154

Resetting the date and time 168

"Memory Stick" Operations Using a "Memory Stick" - introduction..... 170

Recording still images on a "Memory Stick" - Memory Photo recording 177

Superimposing a still image in a "Memory Stick" on a moving picture - MEMORY MIX 182

Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image 187

Copying still images from a mini DV tape - Photo save 191

Viewing a still picture - Memory Photo playback 193

Copying an image recorded on a "Memory Stick" to mini DV tapes 198

Playing back images continuously - SLIDE SHOW 200

Preventing accidental erasure - Image protection 202

Deleting images 204

Writing a print mark - Print mark 208

Additional Information Usable cassettes 210

About i.LINK 214

Troubleshooting 216

Self-diagnosis display 222

Warning indicators and messages 230

Using your camcorder abroad 233

Maintenance information and precautions 234

Specifications 241

Quick Reference

Identifying the parts and controls. 243

Quick Function Guide 256

Index 258

Checking the accessories

Accessories 5

Quick Start Guide 8

Playing a tape 38

Viewing a recording on a TV screen .44

Advanced recording operations

Recording a still picture on a tape - recording a photograph on a tape ...46

Recording using all pixels - PROG.SCAN 50

Using the control panel 52

Using the recording mode 53

Using the generator function 54

Using special effects - image effects 56

Using special effects - digital effects 58

Shooting with manual adjustment 61

Adjusting the white balance 70

Adjusting the recording level internally - audio recording level 73

Quick guide to functions ....257

Correct index 259

Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder.

The following accessories are included in the delivery set of the video camera.

123
456
789
111213

1 Wireless Remote Commander (1) (p. 252) AC-L10A/L10B/L10C AC power adaptor (1), Mains lead (1) (p. 14) 3 NP-F330 battery pack (1) (p. 13, 14) R6 (size AA) battery for Remote Commander (2) (p. 253) Memory Stick Reader/Writer (1), Stand (1), Specified extension cable (1), Driver software (CD-ROM) (1) You cannot use the "PIXELA ImageMixer" software to copy images from your camcorder to your computer. [6] "Memory Stick" (1) (p. 170) 7 A/V connecting cable (1) (p. 44, 105) Hood cap (1) (p. 22) 9 Shoulder strap (1) (p. 249) 10 Application software: PictureGear 4.1Lite (CD-ROM) (1) (p. 197) Lens hood (1) (p. 247) 12 Eyecup (large) (1) (p. 28) 13 21-pin adaptor (1) (p. 45)

1 Remote control unit (1) (p. 252) 2 AC power adapter AC-L10A/L10B/L10C (1), power cord (1) (p. 14) 3 Battery pack NP-F330 (1) (p. 13, 14) 4 AA (R6) batteries for remote control unit (2) (p. 253) 5 "Memory Stick" recording/playback device (1), adaptor (1), specified cable (1), driver software (CD-ROM) (1) The "PIXELA ImageMixer" software cannot be used to copy images from the camera to a computer. 6 "Memory Stick" (1) (p. 170) 7 Audio/video connecting cable (1) (p. 44, 105) 8 Lens cap (1) (p. 22) 9 Shoulder strap (1) (p. 249) 10 Application software: PictureGear 4.1 Lite (CD-ROM) (1) (p. 197) 11 Lens hood (1) (p. 247) 12 Eyecup (large) (1) (p. 28) 13 21-pin adaptor (1) (p. 45)

SONY DCR-VX2000E - PRECAUTIONS - 1

This guide introduces you to the basic way of recording/ playback. See the pages in parentheses "()" for more information.

Connecting the mains lead (p. 18)

Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 13).

Connect the plug with its

triangle mark facing toward the

LCD panel side.

AC power adaptor (supplied)SONY DCR-VX2000E - Connecting the mains lead (p. 18) - 1

Open the DC IN jack cover.

2

Inserting a cassette (p. 20)

1

While pressing the small blue button on the EJECT switch, slide it in the direction of the arrow.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 1 - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 1 - 2

2

Push the middle portion of the back of the cassette to insert it. Insert the cassette into the cassette compartment with the window facing out and the write-protect tab facing upward.

WindowSONY DCR-VX2000E - 2 - 1

3

Close the cassette compartment by pressing the PUSH mark on it.

Close the cassette lid by pressing the PUSH button on the cassette lid.

Write-protect tabSONY DCR-VX2000E - 3 - 1

Viewfinder

When the LCD panel is closed, use the viewfinder placing your eye against its eyecup.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Viewfinder - 1

Press START/STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. To stop recording, press START/STOP again.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Viewfinder - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Viewfinder - 3

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Viewfinder - 4

Slide OPEN back in the direction of the mark to open the LCD panel.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Viewfinder - 5

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Viewfinder - 6

Remove the hood cap.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Viewfinder - 7

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Viewfinder - 8

Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while pressing the small green button. The date and time is indicated for five seconds.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Viewfinder - 9

If the ND1 or ND2 indicator flashes, see page 65.

Monitoring the playback picture on the LCD screen (p. 38)

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Monitoring the playback picture on the LCD screen (p. 38) - 1

Set the POWER switch to VCR while pressing the small green button.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Monitoring the playback picture on the LCD screen (p. 38) - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Monitoring the playback picture on the LCD screen (p. 38) - 3

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Monitoring the playback picture on the LCD screen (p. 38) - 4

Press to rewind the tape.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Monitoring the playback picture on the LCD screen (p. 38) - 5

Press ▸ to start playback.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Monitoring the playback picture on the LCD screen (p. 38) - 6

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Monitoring the playback picture on the LCD screen (p. 38) - 7

NOTE

Do not pick up your camcorder by holding the viewfinder, the LCD panel, the battery pack, or the microphone.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - NOTE - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - NOTE - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - NOTE - 3

SONY DCR-VX2000E - NOTE - 4

Quick Start Guide

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Quick Start Guide - 1

This manual describes the basic functions for recording/playback. See the pages in parentheses “()” for more detailed information.

1 Connect the power cord (p. 18)

Lens capSONY DCR-VX2000E - Connect the power cord (p. 18) - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Connect the power cord (p. 18) - 2

Viewfinder

If the LCD panel is closed, use the viewfinder.

4 Press the START/STOP button. The camcorder will start recording. To stop recording, press the START/STOP button again.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Viewfinder - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Viewfinder - 2

3 Slide the OPEN switch back in the direction of the arrow to open the LCD panel.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Viewfinder - 3

1 Remove the lens cap.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Viewfinder - 4

While pressing the small green button, set the POWER switch to the CAMERA position. The date and time indication will appear for a few seconds.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Viewfinder - 5

If the indicator ND1 or ND2 lights up, see p. 65.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Viewfinder - 6

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Viewfinder - 7

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Viewfinder - 8

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Viewfinder - 9

As you read through this manual, buttons and settings on your camcorder are shown in capital letters.

e.g. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.

When you carry out an operation, you can hear a beep or a melody sound to indicate that the operation is being carried out.

Note on cassette memory

Your camcorder is based on the DV format.

You can only use mini DV cassettes with your camcorder. We recommend that you use a tape with cassette memory CIII.

The functions which require different operations depending on whether or not the tape has cassette memory are:

  • Searching the end point of the recording - end search (p. 36, 43)
  • Searching a recording by index - index search (p. 93)
  • Searching a recording by date - date search (p. 97)
  • Searching for a photo - photo search (p. 99). The functions you can operate only with cassette memory are:
  • Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title - title search (p. 95) Superimposing a title (p. 141)
  • Making your own titles (p. 147)
  • Labeling a cassette (p. 149).

For details, see page 210.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Note on cassette memory - 1

You see this mark in the introduction of the features that are operated only with cassette memory.

Tapes with cassette memory are marked with Clll (Cassette Memory).

Parts with cassette memory are marked with the CP sign (cassette memory).

Note on TV colour systems

TV colour systems differ from country to country. To view your recordings on a TV, you need a PAL system-based TV.

Television programs, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted. Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to the provision of the copyright laws.

Precautions on camcorder care

  • The LCD screen and the viewfinder are manufactured using high-precision technology. However, there may be some tiny black points and/or bright points (red, blue, green or white) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and in the viewfinder. These points occur normally in the manufacturing process and do not affect the recorded picture in any way. Effective ratio of pixels and/or screen is 99.99% or more.
  • Do not let your camcorder get wet. Keep your camcorder away from rain and sea water. Letting your camcorder get wet may cause your camcorder to malfunction. Sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired [a].
  • Never leave your camcorder exposed to temperatures above 60°C (140°F) , such as in a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight [b].
  • Do not place your camcorder so as to point the viewfinder or the LCD screen or lens toward the sun. The inside of the viewfinder, LCD screen, or lens may be damaged [c].

Using this manual

  • Do not insert the cap inside the video camera. Protect the video camera from sea water. Moisture can cause malfunctions in the video camera. Sometimes the fault cannot be repaired [a].
  • Keep the camcorder away from places where the temperature rises above 60 °C, for example, in a car parked in the sun or in direct sunlight [b].
  • Do not expose the viewfinder, LCD screen, or lens to direct sunlight. They may cause damage to the internal parts of the viewfinder, LCD screen, or lens [c].

[a]SONY DCR-VX2000E - Using this manual - 1

[b]SONY DCR-VX2000E - Using this manual - 2

[c]SONY DCR-VX2000E - Using this manual - 3

Contents of the recording cannot be compensated if recording or playback is not made due to a malfunction of the camcorder, video tape, etc.

It is impossible to restore the recorded material if the recording or playback has been damaged due to natural wear of the video camera, video recorder, etc.

Step 1 Preparing the power supply

Installing the battery pack

Install the battery pack to use your camcorder outdoors.

(1) Lift up the viewfinder. (2) Insert the battery pack in the direction of the ∇ mark on the battery pack. Slide the battery pack until it is locked.

To remove the battery pack

Lift up the viewfinder.

Slide the battery pack out in the direction of the arrow while pressing BATT RELEASE down.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - To remove the battery pack - 1

Charging the battery pack

Use the battery pack after charging it. Your camcorder operates only with the "InfoLITHIUM" battery pack (L series).

(1) Open the DC IN jack cover and connect the AC power adaptor supplied with your camcorder to the DC IN jack with the plug's ▲ mark facing toward the LCD panel side. (2) Connect the mains lead to the AC power adaptor. (3) Connect the mains lead to the mains. (4) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). Charging begins.

The remaining battery time is indicated in minutes on the display window.

When the remaining battery indicator changes to □, normal charge is completed. To fully charge the battery (full charge), leave the battery pack attached for about one hour after normal charge is completed until FULL appears on the display window. Fully charging the battery allows you to use the battery longer than usual.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Charging the battery pack - 1

Step 1 Preparing the power supply

After charging the battery pack Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camcorder.

Note on the remaining battery time indicator

The remaining battery time indicator on the LCD screen/display window or in the viewfinder indicates the recording time using the viewfinder. The indicator may not be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are recording. When you close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute for the correct remaining battery time to be displayed.

Notes

  • Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the DC plug of the AC power adaptor. This may cause a short-circuit, damaging the AC power adaptor.
  • Keep the battery pack dry.
  • When the battery pack is not to be used for a long time, charge the battery pack once fully, and then use it until it fully discharges again. Keep the battery pack in a cool place.

Until your camcorder calculates the actual remaining battery time

"---min" appears in the display window.

While charging the battery pack, no indicator appears or the indicator flashes in the display window in the following cases:

  • The battery pack is not installed correctly.
  • The AC power adaptor is disconnected.
  • Something is wrong with the battery pack.

After charging the battery pack

Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camcorder.

Remaining battery time indicator

The remaining battery time indicator on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder shows the time remaining with a bar indicator. The indicator may not be exactly accurate, depending on the conditions under which recording is performed. If you close the LCD panel and open it again, the indicator showing the exact remaining battery time will appear after about a minute.

  • Do not allow metal objects to come into contact with the metal parts of the DC plug of the AC power adaptor. This may cause a short circuit and damage your camcorder. Keep the battery pack in a dry condition. If the battery pack is not used for a long period of time, fully charge it, then use it until it is completely discharged. Store the battery pack in a cool place.

Until your camcorder detects the remaining battery time, the indication "-- - - min" will be displayed in the window.

During charging of the battery pack, the indicator in the window will not be displayed, or it will flash in the following cases:

- The battery pack is not installed correctly. - The AC power adaptor is disconnected. - The battery pack is faulty.

Charging time

Battery pack/Батарейный 6лokFull charge (Normal charge)/Полная заряда (Нормальна заряда)
NP-F330 (supplied/Вхочи в КOMпелков)150 (90)
NP-F530/F550210 (150)
NP-F730/F750300 (240)
NP-F930/F950390 (330)
NP-F960420 (360)

Approximate minutes to charge an empty battery pack

Approximate minutes of recording time when you use a fully charged battery

Numbers in parentheses " ( ) " indicate the time using a normally charged battery.

You cannot use the NP-500/510/710 battery pack on your camcorder.

Approximate recording time in minutes when using a fully charged battery pack

Numbers in parentheses indicate the time when using a battery pack with a normal charge.

The video camera must not use NP-500/510/710 battery packs.

Step 1 Preparing the power supply

  • Approximate continuous recording time at 25°C (77°F). The battery life will be shorter if you use your camcorder in a cold environment. ** Approximate minutes when recording while you repeat recording start/stop, zooming and turning the power on/off. The actual battery life may be shorter.

Table of Contents

* Approximate continuous recording time at 25°C. When using video cameras in cold conditions, the battery pack service life is reduced. **Approximate minutes when recording with intermittent start/stop, zooming, and turning on/off. The battery pack service life may be shorter.

Playing time

Battery pack/ Батарейн的品牌Playing time on LCD screen/ Верma Воспponзve徳ны на захра themselvesPlaying time with LCD closed/ Верma Воспponзve徳ны с захры themselves
NP-F330 (supplied/) Вхордь в komлесу90 (80)110 (95)
NP-F530150 (135)190 (165)
NP-F550185 (165)225 (195)
NP-F730305 (275)385 (345)
NP-F750375 (335)460 (415)
NP-F930475 (430)605 (540)
NP-F950570 (510)705 (630)
NP-F960680 (610)830 (745)

Approximate minutes of playing time when you use a fully charged battery

Numbers in parentheses ( ) indicate the time using a normally charged battery. The battery life will be shorter if you use your camcorder in a cold environment. You cannot use the NP-500/510/710 battery pack on your camcorder.

Notes

  • The supplied battery pack is charged a little.
  • Some types of the battery packs may not be sold in your region or country.

Approximate playing time in minutes when using a fully charged battery pack

Numbers in parentheses ( ) indicate the time when using a battery pack with a normal charge. When using the video camera in cold conditions, the battery pack service life is reduced. You cannot use the NP-500/510/710 battery pack with this video camera.

Notes

  • The supplied battery pack is partially charged. Some types of battery packs may not be sold in your region or country.

Step 1 Preparing the power supply

What is "InfoLITHIUM?"

The "InfoLITHIUM" is a lithium ion battery pack which can exchange data such as battery consumption with compatible video equipment. This unit is compatible with the "InfoLITHIUM" battery pack (L series). Your camcorder operates only with the "InfoLITHIUM" battery. "InfoLITHIUM" battery packs (L series) have the ① InfoLITHIUM ① mark.

"InfoLITHIUM" is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

If the camcorder is immediately turned off Even if the remaining battery time is enough to operate, charge the battery pack fully again. The correct remaining time is displayed.

Connecting to the mains

When you use your camcorder for a long time, we recommend that you power it from the mains using the AC power adaptor.

(1) Open the DC IN jack cover and connect the AC power adaptor to the DC IN jack on your camcorder with the plug's mark facing toward the LCD panel side. (2) Connect the mains lead to the AC power adaptor. (3) Connect the mains lead to the mains.

Step 1 Preparing the power supply

Precaution

The set is not disconnected from the AC power source (mains) as long as it is connected to the mains, even if the set itself has been turned off.

Notes

  • The mains lead must only be changed at an authorized service shop.
  • AC power adaptor can supply power even if the battery pack is attached to your camcorder.
  • The DC IN jack has source priority. This means that the battery pack cannot supply any power if the mains lead is connected to the DC IN jack, even when the mains lead is not plugged into the mains.

Using a car battery

Use the Sony DC Adaptor/Charger (not supplied).

Preparation of the power source

Precautions

The device does not disconnect from the AC power source until it is unplugged from the electrical outlet, even if the device itself is turned off.

Application.

-The power cord should be replaced only by a qualified service technician. Power from the AC adapter can only be supplied when the battery pack is connected to the video camera. -The DC IN jack has priority for power supply. This means that power from the battery pack is not supplied while the power cord is connected to the DC IN jack, even if the power cord is not plugged into the wall outlet.

Using a car battery

Use a Sony DC power adapter/charger (not supplied).

Step 2 Inserting a cassette

(1) Install the power source. (2) While pressing the small blue button on the EJECT switch, slide it in the direction of the arrow. After the cassette lid is opened, the cassette compartment automatically opens. (3) Push the middle portion of the back of the cassette to insert it. Insert the cassette in a straight line deeply into the cassette compartment with the window facing out and the write-protect tab facing upward. (4) Close the cassette compartment by pressing the PUSH mark on it. (5) Close the cassette lid until it clicks by pressing the PUSH button on the lid.

Step 2 Inserting a cassette

(1) Set the power source switch. (2) Press the small blue button on the EJECT switch, then turn it in the direction of the arrow. After opening the cassette compartment cover, the cassette holder will open automatically. (3) Press the middle of the cassette's rear side for installation. Insert the cassette straight into the cassette compartment until it stops, so that the window faces outward and the dust flap is facing up. (4) Close the cassette compartment by pressing the PUSH mark on it. (5) Close the cassette compartment cover until it clicks, pressing the PUSH button on it.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Step 2 Inserting a cassette - 1

5SONY DCR-VX2000E - Step 2 Inserting a cassette - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Step 2 Inserting a cassette - 3

To eject a cassette

Follow the procedure above, and take out the cassette in step 3.

Note

The cassette lid will not be closed when you press any part of the lid other than the PUSH button.

Perform the procedure described above and insert the cassette in step 3.

Application

The cassette compartment lid will not close if you press any other part of the lid instead of PUSH.

Step 2 Inserting a cassette

When you use mini DV cassettes with cassette memory

Read the instruction about cassette memory to use this function properly (p. 210).

To prevent accidental erasure

Slide the write-protect tab on the cassette to the protect position.

Step 2 Inserting a cassette

When using mini DV cassettes with cassette memory

Important instructions about the cassette memory for proper use of this function (p. 210).

To prevent accidental erasure

The tape cassette must be inserted into the protective housing.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Step 2 Inserting a cassette - 1

If the grip strap prevents the cassette lid from opening fully

Adjust the length of the grip strap (p. 249).

If flashes even if the cassette has been inserted

Press the PUSH button again to close the cover firmly.

Changing the grip does not allow the cassette compartment cover to be fully opened.

Adjust the length of the grip strap (p. 249).

Press the cap again to close it tightly.

Recording a picture

Your camcorder automatically focuses for you.

(1) Remove the hood cap and pull the hood cap string to fix it. (2) Install the power source and insert a cassette. See "Step 1" and "Step 2" for more information (p. 13 to 21). (3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while pressing the small green button. Your camcorder is set to the standby mode. (4) Slide OPEN in the direction of the ▸ mark to open the LCD panel.

The picture now being shot is displayed on the LCD screen, and it disappears from the viewfinder screen.

(5) Press START/STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The "REC" indicator appears.

The camera recording lamps located on the front and rear of your camcorder light up. To stop recording, press START/STOP again.

You can use REC START/STOP located on the front instead of START/STOP on the rear.

Camera recording lamps / MicrophoneSONY DCR-VX2000E - Recording a picture - 1

40min REC 0:00:01SONY DCR-VX2000E - Recording a picture - 2

If the ND1 or ND2 indicator flashes on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, the ND filter is necessary. Set the ND FILTER selector to 1 or 2. However, if you change the position during recording, the brightness of the picture may change or audio noise may occur. This is not a malfunction. We recommend that you check the position of the ND FILTER selector before shooting. See "Using the ND filter" on page 65.

Notes

  • Fasten the grip strap firmly.
  • Do not touch the microphone during recording.

Note on the recording mode

Your camcorder records and plays back in SP (standard play) mode and in LP (long play) mode. Select SP or LP in the menu settings. In LP mode, you can record 1.5 times as long as in SP mode.

When you record a tape on your camcorder in LP mode, we recommend playing the tape on your camcorder.

Note on the LOCK switch

When you slide the LOCK switch to the left, the POWER switch can no longer be set to MEMORY accidentally. The LOCK switch is set to the right as a default setting. We recommend that you set the LOCK switch to the left when you record on a mini DV cassette.

Note on the progressive mode

If you intend to use the images on your PC or play the images back as still images, we recommend that you set PROG. SCAN to ON in the menu settings before shooting (p. 50). The picture quality may improve in this mode, but if you shoot a moving subject, the image may shake when it is played back.

Insert a cassette or in the viewfinder the indicator ND1 or ND2 will appear.

You need the ND filter. Set the ND FILTER switch to position 1 or 2. When changing the position during recording, the brightness of the image may change or flicker. However, this is not a malfunction. It is recommended to check the ND filter position before shooting. See "Using the ND Filter" on page 65.

Notes on use

Securely attach the grip belt. - During recording, do not touch the microphone.

Notes on recording modes

This camcorder performs recording and playback in SP (standard play) and LP (long play) modes. Select the SP or LP mode in the menu settings. In LP mode, you can record 1.5 times longer than in SP mode. If a tape was recorded on this camcorder in LP mode, it is recommended to play it back on this same camcorder.

LOCK switch

If you slide the LOCK switch to the left, the POWER switch cannot be accidentally set to MEMORY. The LOCK switch is set to the right position (default setting) at the factory. When recording on a cassette with memory, it is recommended to set the LOCK switch to the left position.

Notes on progressive mode: If you need to use images as still images or play them back as still images, it is recommended to set PROG. SCAN to ON in the menu settings before shooting (p. 50). In this mode, the image quality may improve, however, if the subject is moving, the image may flicker during playback.

To enable smooth transition

Transition between the last scene you recorded and the next scene is smooth as long as you do not eject the cassette even if you turn off your camcorder. When you use a tape with cassette memory, however, you can make the transition smooth even after ejecting the cassette if you use the end search function (p. 36).

However, check the following:

  • When you change the battery pack, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
  • Do not mix recordings in the SP mode and ones in the LP mode on one tape.

Note on tape transition

The playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly between scenes when:

  • You change the recording mode (SP/LP).
  • You record in LP mode.

If you leave your camcorder in standby mode for five minutes while the cassette is inserted

Your camcorder automatically turns off. This is to prevent tape wear and save battery power. To resume the standby mode, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), and to CAMERA again. When a cassette is not inserted, your camcorder does not turn off.

The transition between the last recorded scene and the next scene will be smooth as long as the cassette is not removed, even if the camcorder is tilted.

However, when using a tape with memory, you can create a smooth transition even after removing the cassette, if the "Ponck KOHa" function is used (p. 36).

However, the following should be noted:

- When changing the battery pack, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). - Do not make recordings in both SP and LP modes on the same tape.

Notes on transitions

The displayed image may be distorted, or it may be recorded incorrectly between scenes, if:

- You change the recording mode (SP/LP). - You record in LP mode.

The cassette can be inserted into the slot and remains in place for minutes.

The video camera will turn off automatically. This prevents wear and battery drain. To return to standby mode, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), then back to CAMERA. If the cassette is not inserted, the video camera will not turn off.

Adjusting the LCD screen

The LCD panel is opened up to 90 degrees and it rotates about 90 degrees to the viewfinder side and about 180 degrees to the lens side. If you turn the LCD panel over so that it faces the other way in standby or recording mode, the indicator appears on the LCD screen and in the viewfinder (Mirror mode).

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Adjusting the LCD screen - 1

To close the LCD panel, set it vertically and swing it into the camcorder body until it clicks.

Note

When opening the LCD panel, the viewfinder is automatically turned off, however, it is not turned off when the LCD panel is turned over or the camcorder is in mirror mode.

When you use the LCD screen outdoors in direct sunlight

The LCD screen may be difficult to see. If this happens, we recommend that you use the viewfinder.

When you adjust the angle of the LCD panel Make sure that the LCD panel is opened up to 90 degrees.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Note - 1

If you find it difficult to see the LCD screen, it is recommended to use the viewfinder.

When adjusting the angle of the LCD panel

Make sure the LCD panel is open at 90 degrees.

When using both the LCD screen and the viewfinder during shooting The usable time of the battery pack when using both the LCD screen and the viewfinder will be a little shorter than when using the viewfinder only.

Pictures in the mirror mode The picture on the LCD screen is a mirror image. However, the recording picture will be normal.

During recording in mirror mode ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander does not work.

Indicators in the mirror mode

The STBY indicator appears as and REC as . Some of the other indicators appear mirror-reversed and others are not displayed. However, if you close the LCD panel with the LCD screen turned over, indicators appear normally.

Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen

To adjust the brightness of the LCD screen, press LCD BRIGHT + or -. The battery life is longer when the LCD panel is closed. Use the viewfinder instead of the LCD screen to save the battery power.

When using the LCD screen and the viewfinder during shooting, the battery pack's usable time will be a little shorter than when using only the viewfinder.

Images in mirror mode: The image on the LCD screen will be displayed as a mirror image. However, the recorded image will be normal.

The ZERO SET MEMORY button on the remote control does not work in mirror mode.

The top indicator appears in the mirror image, and the REC indicator appears in the mirror image. Some other indicators appear in the mirror image, and some of them will not be displayed at all. However, if the LCD is closed with the screen flipped, the indicators will be displayed in the normal view.

Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen

On the LCD screen backlight You can change the brightness of the backlight. Select LCD B.L. in the menu settings (p. 154).

Even if you do the LCD screen adjustment using the LCD BRIGHT + / - buttons, or using LCD B.L. and LCD COLOUR items in the menu settings

The recorded picture will not be affected.

Recording in a low position

You can record in a low position to get an interesting recording angle. Lift up the viewfinder or rotate the LCD panel with the screen facing up to record from a low position. In this case, it is useful to use the REC START/ STOP button located on the front or the camcorder.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Recording in a low position - 1

After recording

(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). (2) Close the LCD panel. (3) Eject the cassette. (4) Remove the battery pack.

Adjusting the viewfinder

If you record pictures with the LCD panel closed, check the picture with the viewfinder. Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight so that the indicators in the viewfinder come into sharp focus.

Lift up the viewfinder and move the viewfinder adjustment lever.

Adjusting the viewfinder

Turn on the device and look through the eyepiece. Adjust the eyepiece focus according to your vision so that the indicators in the eyepiece are clearly focused.

The output device of the device.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Adjusting the viewfinder - 1

To adjust the brightness of the viewfinder screen, use the VF B.L. item in the menu settings (p. 154).

Even if you adjust the viewfinder screen backlight

The recorded picture will not be affected.

When the shooting conditions are too bright

Use the supplied large eyecup. Fit it onto the camcorder by stretching the corners a little.

You can attach it with the large part of it located on both left and right.

Using the zoom feature

To zoom using the zoom lever

Press the power zoom lever a little for a slower zoom. Press it deeper for a faster zoom.

Using the zoom function sparingly results in better-looking recordings.

"T" side: for telephoto (subject appears closer)

"W" side: for wide-angle (subject appears farther away)

Using the zoom function

For zooming with the zoom lever

Press the zoom lever lightly

For slow zooming

Press it harder for fast zooming.

Excessive use of the zoom function

Zooming ensures better results.

Topoha "T": for telephony (object attached)

"W" side: for wide-angle

"Wide-angle" (subject appears farther away)

SONY DCR-VX2000E - For zooming with the zoom lever - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - For zooming with the zoom lever - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - For zooming with the zoom lever - 3

SONY DCR-VX2000E - For zooming with the zoom lever - 4

SONY DCR-VX2000E - For zooming with the zoom lever - 5

When you shoot close to a subject

If you cannot get a sharp focus, press the "W" side of the power zoom lever until the focus is sharp. You can shoot a subject that is at least about 80 cm (about 2 feet 5/8 inch) away from the lens surface in the telephoto position, or about 1 cm (about 1/2 inch) away in the wide-angle position.

Shooting a subject from a close distance

If you cannot get a clear

focus, press the "V" side

of the zoom lever until the focus is achieved. In

the "Telephoto" position, you can shoot a subject that is at a distance of no less than 80 cm from the subject, or about 1 cm in the

"wide-angle" position.

To zoom using the zoom ring

Using the zoom ring, you can control the zoom by your desired speed and you can make fine adjustments.

During recording, turn the zoom ring to the desired speed.

If you turn the zoom ring quickly, the zoom may not respond to the zoom ring.

Rotate the zoom ring with appropriate speed.

Using the digital zoom - Zoom greater than 12 ×

Zoom greater than 12× is performed digitally, if you set D ZOOM to 24× or 48× in the menu settings. The digital zoom function is set to OFF as a default setting (p. 154). If you use the digital zoom function, the picture quality deteriorates.

Note

When you turn the zoom lever, the zoom speed may not change.

Set the zoom ring to the corresponding speed.

Using the Digital Zoom Function - Zooming More Than 12x

Zooming more than 12x is performed digitally when you set the D ZOOM parameter to 24x or 48x in the menu settings. The Digital Zoom function is set to OFF (off) at the factory, which is the default setting (p. 154). When using the Digital Zoom function, image quality may deteriorate.

The right-ended portion of the bar shows the digital zooming zone.

The digital zooming zone appears when you set D ZOOM to 24x or 48x.

The right side of the bar on the screen shows the digital zooming zone.

The digital zooming zone appears when the D ZOOM parameter is set to 24x or 48x.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Using the Digital Zoom Function - Zooming More Than 12x - 1

You cannot use the digital zoom:

  • When you set PROG. SCAN to ON in the menu settings (p. 154).
  • When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY.

Indicators displayed during recording

The indicators are not recorded on the tapes.

The digital zoom will not work:

  • If the PROG. SCAN parameter is set to ON in the menu settings (p. 154). - If the POWER switch is set to MEMORY.

Indicators displayed during recording

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Indicators displayed during recording - 1

[a] Remaining battery time indicator

This appears after you turn on the power and wait for a while.

[b] Cassette memory indicator This appears when using a tape with cassette memory. [c] Recording mode indicator [d] STBY/REC indicator [e] Time code indicator/Tape counter [f] Remaining tape indicator

This appears after you insert a cassette.

[g] Guide frame [h] ND filter indicator

This flashes when the ND FILTER selector should be set. After you have set the ND FILTER selector, the ND FILTER position selected is indicated. (When the ND OFF position is selected, the indication disappears.)

[i] Time indicator

The time is displayed about five seconds after the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY.

[j] Date indicator

The date is displayed about five seconds after the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY.

[a] Remaining battery time indicator

[b] Cassette memory indicator

This indicator appears when using cassette memory.

[c] Recording mode indicator. [d] STBY/REC indicator [e] Time code/Counter indicator [f] Remaining tape indicator. This indicator appears after cassette installation. [g] Control frame [h] ND filter indicator

It lights up when it is necessary to set the ND FILTER switch. After setting the ND FILTER switch to the ND FILTER position, the corresponding indicator is displayed. (When the switch is set to the ND OFF position, the indicator disappears.)

[i] Time indicator

After setting the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY, the time indicator is displayed for a few seconds.

[j] Date indicator

After setting the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY, the date indicator is displayed for a few seconds.

Time code

The time code indicates the recording or playback time, "0:00:00" (hours : minutes : seconds) in CAMERA mode and "0:00:00:00" (hours : minutes : seconds : frames) in VCR mode. You cannot rewrite only the time code.

Remaining tape indicator

The indicator may not be displayed accurately depending on the tape.

Note on recording date/time

Recording date/time is not displayed during shooting, however, it is automatically recorded on the tape. You can check the recording date/ time during playback by pressing DATA CODE.

Shooting backlit subjects (BACK LIGHT)

When you shoot a subject with the light source behind the subject or a subject with a light background, use the backlight function.

Press BACK LIGHT in standby, recording, or memory mode.

The indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

To cancel, press BACK LIGHT again.

Recording time

The recording time indicates the recording or playback time, "0:00:00" (hours:minutes:seconds) in CAMERA mode and "0:00:00" (hours:minutes:seconds:frames) in VCR mode. You cannot record only the time code.

Tape remaining indicator

The indicator display may be inaccurate depending on the tape.

Recording date/time

The date/time is not displayed during shooting, but it is automatically recorded on the tape. You can check the date/time in playback mode by pressing the DATA CODE button.

Shooting with backlight (BACK LIGHT)

If you are shooting a subject with a light source behind it or a subject with a bright background, use the backlight function.

During standby, recording, or playback, press the BACK LIGHT button.

The indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

To cancel, press the BACK LIGHT button again.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Shooting with backlight (BACK LIGHT) - 1

If you press one of the following buttons when using the backlight function

The backlight function will be cancelled.

  • SPOT LIGHT
  • EXPOSURE

When you manually adjust the exposure

You cannot use the backlight function.

Using the spot light function

This function prevents people's faces, for example, from appearing excessively white when shooting subjects lit by strong light, such as in the theater.

Press SPOT LIGHT in standby, recording, or memory mode.

The indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

To cancel, press SPOT LIGHT again.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Using the spot light function - 1

Image stabilization

If you press one of the following buttons while using the backlight function

The backlight function will be canceled.

  • SPOT LIGHT

-EXPOSURE

Setting the exposure

You cannot use the backlight function.

Using the spotlight mode

This function allows you to brighten the subject. For example, it can be used to highlight objects in a theater, where spotlighting is often used.

In the standby mode, press the SPOT LIGHT button.

On the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, the indicator appears.

To cancel, press the SPOT LIGHT button again.

If you press one of the following buttons when using the spot light function

The spot light function will be cancelled.

-BACK LIGHT

  • EXPOSURE

When you manually adjust the exposure, you cannot use the spot light function.

You cannot use the spot light mode while in the following settings:

  • Shutter speed value of 1/25 or smaller Old movie
  • Low lux mode of the PROGRAM AE function

Press one of the following buttons when using the PROGRAM AE function.

The PROGRAM AE function will be canceled.

Self-timer recording

You can make a recording with the self-timer. This recording is useful when you want to record yourself. You can also use the Remote Commander.

(1) Press (self-timer) in standby mode. The (self-timer) indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (2) Press START/STOP. Self-timer starts counting down from 10 seconds with a beep sound. In the last two seconds of the countdown, the beep sound gets faster, then recording starts automatically.

Self-timer recording

You can perform a self-start timer recording. This recording can be useful when you need to record yourself. For this, you can also use the remote control.

(1) Press the button (timer self-start). The indicator (timer self-start) will appear on the LCD screen. (2) Press the START/STOP button. The self-start timer will begin counting down from 10 seconds with a sound signal. During the last two seconds of the countdown, the sound signal will be louder, and then recording will start automatically.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Self-timer recording - 1

To stop the self-timer before recording

Press START/STOP again. Use the Remote Commander for convenience.

To record still pictures on tapes using the self-timer

Press PHOTO in step 2 (p. 48).

To record still pictures on a "Memory Stick" using the self-timer

Press (self-timer), then press PHOTO in memory mode (p. 181).

To cancel self-timer recording

Press (self-timer) so that the indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen while your camcorder is in standby mode.

Note

The self-timer recording is automatically cancelled when:

  • Self-timer recording is finished.
  • The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.

Checking the recording - END SEARCH / EDITSEARCH / Rec Review

You can use these buttons to check recorded pictures or shoot so that the transition between the last recorded scene and the next scene you will record is smooth.

You can easily go to the end of the last recorded portion.

Press END SEARCH in standby mode. The camcorder rewinds or fast-forwards the tape and the last five-second recorded picture is played back. After playback the camcorder turns to standby mode. You can monitor the sound from the speaker or headphones.

Changing the next recording start point — EDITSEARCH

You can change the next recording start point in standby mode.

Hold down the + / - side of EDITSEARCH in standby mode. The recorded picture is played back.

  • : to go forward
  • : to go backward

Release EDITSEARCH to stop playback. If you press START/STOP, re-recording begins from the point you released EDITSEARCH. You cannot monitor the sound.

Checking the last recorded picture — Rec Review

You can check the last recorded portion.

Press the - side of EDITSEARCH momentarily in standby mode.

The last few-seconds of picture is played back and the camcorder returns to standby. You can monitor the sound from the speaker or headphones.

End search function

When you use a tape without cassette memory, the end search function does not work once you eject the cassette after you have recorded on the tape. If you use a tape with cassette memory, the end search function works even once you eject the cassette.

If there is a blank portion at the beginning or between the recorded portions, the end search function may not work correctly (p. 210).

You can monitor the playback picture on the LCD screen. If you close the LCD panel, you can monitor the playback picture in the viewfinder. You can also control playback using the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder.

(1) Install the power source and insert the recorded tape. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR while pressing the small green button. The video control buttons light up. (3) Slide OPEN in the direction of the mark to open the LCD panel. (4) Press to rewind the tape. (5) Press to start playback. (6) To adjust the volume, press either of the VOLUME + / - buttons.

Playback - Basic Operations - Playing a Tape

When monitoring on the LCD screen You can turn the LCD panel over and move it back to the camcorder body with the LCD screen facing out.

For simplicity on the screen, you can flip the control panel and fold it with the camera body, so that the screen will be facing outward.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Playback - Basic Operations - Playing a Tape - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Playback - Basic Operations - Playing a Tape - 2

When you close the LCD panel, you cannot monitor the sound from the speaker. However, when the LCD panel is turned over to view on the LCD screen, you can monitor the sound from the speaker.

To control the display of the screen indicators

Press DISPLAY on the camcorder or on the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder. The indicators appear on the LCD screen. To make the indicators disappear, press DISPLAY again.

If the screen of the LCD is facing down, the sound will be heard through the loudspeaker. However, if the screen of the LCD is facing up, the sound can be heard through the loudspeaker.

Your camcorder automatically records not only images on the tape but also the recording data (date/time or various settings when recorded) (Data code).

Press DATA CODE on the camcorder or on the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder in playback mode.

The display changes as follows: date/time → various settings (SteadyShot, white balance, gain, shutter speed, aperture value, exposure mode) → no indicator

Date/time/Data/TimeSONY DCR-VX2000E - To control the display of the screen indicators - 1

[a] SteadyShot OFF indicator [b] Exposure mode/PROGRAM AE mode indicator [c] White balance indicator [d] Gain indicator [e] Shutter speed indicator [f] Aperture value

To not display the various settings, set DATA CODE to DATE in the menu settings (p. 154).

The display changes as follows: date/time ↔ no indicator

Using the Data Code function

The device automatically records not only images but also data about the recording (date/time and various settings at the time of recording) (data code).

In playback mode, press the DATA CODE button on the camcorder or on the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder.

The indicator changes as follows:

Data/Time -> various settings (steady shot, white balance, gain, shutter speed, aperture value, exposure mode) -> no indication

Various settingsSONY DCR-VX2000E - Using the Data Code function - 1

[a] Steady shot off indicator [b] Exposure mode/Program AE indicator [c] White balance indicator [d] Gain indicator [e] Shutter speed indicator [f] Aperture value

To cancel the display of various settings

Set the DATA CODE parameter to DATE in the menu settings (p. 154).

The indication will change as follows:

Data/Time <- no indication

Recording data

Recording data is your camcorder's information when you have recorded something. In CAMERA mode, the recording data will not be displayed.

When you use the data code function, "... ----" (date) or "---:---:" (time) appears if:

-A blank portion of the tape is being played back. - The tape is unreadable due to tape damage or noise. - The tape was recorded by the camcorder without the date and time set.

Data code

When you connect your camcorder to the TV, the data code also appears on the TV screen (p. 44).

Note on the date/time indicator

Recording date/time is not displayed during shooting, however, it is automatically recorded on the tape. You can check the recording date/ time during playback by pressing DATA CODE.

If the exposure adjustment is set to minimum

"CLOSE" is displayed at the location of the aperture value.

Recorded data

Recorded data contains information about the recording made by the camcorder. The time and date data will not be displayed.

When using the data code function, the symbols "--- ----" (data) or "--- :---" (time) appear if:

- The recorded section is being played back. - The tape cannot be read due to damage or interference. - The recording was made on the camcorder without setting the date and time.

Data code

If the camcorder is connected to a TV, the data code will also be displayed on the TV screen (p.44).

Date/time indicator

The date/time of recording is not displayed during shooting, but it is automatically recorded on the tape. The date/time of recording can be checked in playback mode by pressing the DATA CODE button.

If the minimum exposure adjustment is set

Instead of the aperture value, the display "CLOSE" appears.

Various playback modes

To operate video control buttons, set the POWER switch to VCR.

To view a still picture (playback pause)

Press I during playback. To resume normal playback, press ▸ or I

To advance the tape

Press ▸ in stop mode. To resume normal playback, press ▸.

To rewind the tape

Press ◀ in stop mode. To resume normal playback, press ▸.

To change the playback direction

Press < on the Remote Commander during playback to reverse the playback direction. To resume normal playback, press ▸.

Keep pressing ◀ or ▸ during playback. To resume normal playback, release the button.

To monitor the picture at high-speed while advancing or rewinding the tape (skip scan)

Keep pressing ◀ while rewinding or ▸ while advancing the tape. To resume rewinding or advancing, release the button.

To view the picture at slow speed (slow playback)

Press ▸ during playback. For slow playback in the reverse direction, press < on the Remote Commander, then press ▸. To resume normal playback, press ▸.

To view a still picture (playback pause)

Press the button during playback to resume normal playback, press the button

To view the picture at double speed

Press × 2 on the Remote Commander during playback. For double speed playback in the reverse direction, press < , then press × 2 on the Remote Commander. To resume normal playback, press .

To view the picture frame-by-frame

Press on the Remote Commander in playback pause mode. For frame-by-frame playback in the reverse direction, press .To resume normal playback, press

Press END SEARCH in stop mode. The last five seconds of the recorded portion plays back and stops.

In various playback modes

Sound is muted. - The previous picture may remain as a mosaic image during playback.

When the playback pause mode lasts for five minutes

Your camcorder automatically enters the stop mode. To resume playback, press

Slow playback

Slow playback can be performed smoothly on your camcorder, however, this function does not work for a signal output through the DV IN/OUT jack.

When you play back a tape in reverse

Horizontal noise may appear at the center, or the top and bottom of the screen. This is not a malfunction.

Tape playback

If there is a pause during playback, it will last for 5 minutes.

The camcorder will automatically switch to the standby mode. To resume playback, press the button.

Slow playback

Slow playback is performed by the camcorder smoothly, without interference; however, this function does not work with the DV IN/OUT jack output signal.

Playback in the reverse direction

Horizontal interference lines may appear at the top and bottom of the screen.

However, this is not a malfunction.

Viewing the recording on TV

Connect your camcorder to your TV or VCR with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder to watch the playback picture on the TV screen. You can operate the video control buttons in the same way as when you monitor playback pictures on the LCD screen. When monitoring the playback picture on the TV screen, we recommend that you power your camcorder from the mains using the AC power adaptor (p. 18). Refer to the operating instructions of your TV or VCR.

Open the jack cover. Connect your camcorder to the TV using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder. Then, set the TV/VCR selector on the TV to VCR.

If your TV is connected to a VCR

Connect your camcorder to the line input on the VCR by using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder. Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE.

If your TV or VCR is a monaural type

Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video input jack and only the white plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. The red plugs are not used.

If the TV is connected to the VCR

Connect the camcorder to the input jack of the VCR using the supplied audio/video connecting cable. Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE.

If the TV or VCR is monaural type

The red connectors are used only to connect the audio/video cable to the input jack of the video monitor. The red connectors are not used for the video monitor input jack.

If your TV/VCR has a 21-pin connector (EUROCONNECTOR)

Use the 21-pin adaptor supplied with your camcorder.

This adaptor is exclusive to an output.

Electrical connector / mounting bracket 21-pin connector (EUROCONNECTOR)

Spare parts kit 21-7tBpBkoBbI, supplied with the video camera.

This adaptor is exclusively for output.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Electrical connector / mounting bracket 21-pin connector (EUROCONNECTOR) - 1

If your TV or VCR has an S video jack Connect using an S video cable (not supplied) to obtain high-quality pictures. With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect the S video cable (not supplied) to the S video jacks on both your camcorder and the TV or the VCR. This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.

When you adjust the TV screen

If you monitor the shooting picture, not the playback picture, set COLOUR BAR to ON in the menu settings (p. 154). The colour bar is displayed on the TV screen.

If the TV or VCR has an S video jack.

Connecting to a TV using an S-Video cable (not supplied) for high-quality images. When connecting this way, do not connect the yellow (video) plug of the audio/video cable.

Connect the S-Video cable (not supplied) to the S-Video input on the video camera or video monitor. This connection allows you to obtain high-quality images in DV format.

Adjusting the image on the TV screen

To check the image quality during shooting, not during playback, in the menu settings for the COLOUR BAR parameter, set the value to ON (p. 154). A color bar will be displayed on the TV screen.

- Advanced Recording Operations - Recording a still image on a tape - Tape Photo recording

You can record still images on mini DV tapes with all the pixels in the progressive mode. See page 50 for details. This mode is useful when you print images using a video printer (not supplied).

Besides the operation described here, your camcorder can record still images on a "Memory Stick" (p. 177).

(1) In standby mode, keep pressing PHOTO lightly until a picture freezes. The CAPTURE indicator appears. Recording does not start yet.

To change the image, release PHOTO, select an image again, and then press and hold PHOTO lightly.

(2) Press PHOTO deeper. The still image on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder is recorded for about seven seconds. The sound during those seven seconds is also recorded.

The still image is displayed on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder until recording is completed.

- Improved shooting operations for recording still images on the fly - recording photographs on the fly

You can record still images in progressive mode. Detailed information is given on page 50. This mode is useful if you need to print images using a video printer (not included).

After the above operations, the video camera can record still images on a "Memory Stick" (p.177).

(1) In standby mode, keep pressing PHOTO lightly until a picture freezes. The CAPTURE indicator appears. Recording does not start yet. To change the image, release PHOTO, select an image again, and then press and hold PHOTO lightly.

Press the PHOTO button firmly. The still image on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder will be recorded for about seven seconds. During these seven seconds, the sound will also be recorded. The still image is displayed on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder until the recording is finished.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - - Improved shooting operations for recording still images on the fly - recording photographs on the fly - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - - Improved shooting operations for recording still images on the fly - recording photographs on the fly - 2

The number of still images recordable on a mini DV cassette

You can record about 510 images in SP mode and about 765 images in LP mode on a 60-minute cassette.

Maximum number of still images that can be recorded on a mini DV cassette.

On a 60-minute cassette, you can record approximately 510 images in SP mode and about 765 images in LP mode.

Recording a still image on a tape - Tape Photo recording

Notes

  • During tape photo recording, you cannot change the mode or setting.
  • The PHOTO button does not work:
  • While the fader function is set or in use.
  • While the digital effect function is set or in use.
  • Do not shake the camcorder during tape photo recording. The recorded image may be blurred.

To do tape photo recording using the Remote Commander

Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander. Your camcorder immediately records an image on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

When you do tape photo recording during normal CAMERA recording

You cannot check an image on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder by pressing PHOTO lightly. Press PHOTO deeper. The still image is then recorded for about seven seconds and your camcorder returns to standby mode.

When shooting a moving object in Tape Photo recording

When playing back the image by another unit, the image may be blurred. This is not a malfunction.

Recording a still image on a tape

Notes

  • While shooting a still image on a tape, you cannot change the mode or settings. The PHOTO button does not work: - if the tape is set or the tape is being used - if the tape is set or the tape is being used for digital effects.
  • Do not shake the camcorder while shooting a still image on a tape. The recorded image may be blurred.

Self-timer tape photo recording

You can make a tape photo recording with the self-timer. This mode is useful when you want to record yourself. You can also use the Remote Commander.

(1) Press (self-timer) in standby mode. The (self-timer) indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (2) Press PHOTO deeply. Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep sound. In the last two seconds of the countdown, the beep sound gets faster, then recording starts automatically.

To cancel self-timer recording

Press (self-timer) so that the indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen while your camcorder is in standby mode. You cannot cancel the self-timer recording using the Remote Commander.

Note

The self-timer recording mode is automatically cancelled when:

  • Self-timer tape photo recording is finished.
  • The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.

Printing the still image

You can print a still image by using a video printer (not supplied). Connect with the video printer using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder.

Connect the yellow plugs of the cable to the video input of the video printer and the VIDEO jack on your camcorder. Refer to the operating instructions of the video printer as well.

Printing the still image

The displayed image can be printed using a video printer (not included in the kit). Connect the video printer using the connecting cable to the video/audio output provided on the video camera.

Connect the appropriate cables to the input connector of the video printer, and to the VIDEO connector of the video camera. See also the video printer's operating instructions.

Signal flowSONY DCR-VX2000E - Printing the still image - 1

If the video printer is equipped with an S video input

Use an S video connecting cable (not supplied). Connect it to the SVIDEO jack on your camcorder and the S video input of the video printer.

The required video resolution is missing.

Connect the S video cable (not included). Connect it to the S VIDEO input on the camera and to the S video input on the video printer.

Shooting with all the pixels - PROG. SCAN

To import moving images to your PC to view still images, we recommend you record in progressive mode. To use progressive mode, follow the procedure below. Still images produced this way are more stable than those recorded on a mini DV in normal mode, and thus are more suitable for analysing high-speed action such as sports scenes. (Since this camcorder takes in an image every 1/15 of a second in progressive mode, moving images recorded in this mode may be subject to too much jitter. To view moving images, we recommend recording in normal mode.)

Scan using all pixels - PROG. SCAN

The images obtained on a PC for viewing still images are recommended to be recorded in progressive mode. To use progressive mode, perform the actions described below. Still images obtained in this way are more stable compared to those recorded in normal mode, and therefore are more suitable for analyzing fast-moving scenes, such as sports competitions. (In progressive mode, the camcorder captures an image every 1/15 of a second; images recorded in this mode may flicker strongly. For viewing moving images, it is recommended to record in normal mode.)

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Scan using all pixels - PROG. SCAN - 1

(1) Press MENU to display the menu in standby mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select M, then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PROG. SCAN, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (5) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The PROG. SCAN indicator lights up.

(1) Press the MENU key to display the menu. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the setting, then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the PROG. SCAN setting, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the ON setting, then press the dial. (5) Press the MENU key to clear the menu indication. The PROG.SCAN indicator lights up.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Scan using all pixels - PROG. SCAN - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Scan using all pixels - PROG. SCAN - 3

To return to normal mode

Select OFF in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

Note on the progressive mode

A normal TV broadcast divides the screen into two finer fields and displays them in turns every 1/50 of a second (Interlace format). Thus, the actual image displayed in an instant covers only half of the apparent image area. Displaying the whole image simultaneously on a full screen is called displaying with all the pixels. In this mode, the resolution of the still picture is clearer than in the normal mode. This camcorder takes in an image every 2/25 of a second, which may cause the image of a moving object to go out of focus. This camcorder is originally programmed to record in the normal TV format.

When shooting under fluorescent light When shooting in progressive mode under fluorescent light or light bulbs, a rare phenomenon may happen in which the screen lights up brightly (Flicker phenomenon). This is not a malfunction. If you want to stop this phenomenon, set PROG. SCAN to OFF in the menu settings.

On digital zooming

You cannot use digital zooming in this mode.

Shooting with all pixels - PROG. SCAN

In normal television picture display, the screen is divided into two parts, which are alternately displayed every 1/50 s (interlaced scanning). Thus, the actual dimensions of the displayed image are only half of the visible image size. Simultaneous display of the entire image on the screen is called display using all pixels. In this mode, the resolution of a still image is better than in normal mode. The video camera allows image refresh every 2/25 s, which may cause loss of focus on a moving object. Initially, the video camera is programmed for recording in television format.

When shooting under fluorescent lighting during shooting in progressive mode with daylight lamps or incandescent lamps, a flicker effect may occur, in which the screen appears bright (flickering). However, this is not a malfunction. If it is necessary to eliminate this effect, set the PROG. SCAN setting to OFF in the menu settings.

About digital transfer

In this mode, digital transfer cannot be used.

You can easily make the picture be on a horizontal line using the guide frame. The guide frame is not recorded.

(1) Press MENU to display the menu in standby, recording, or memory mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select, then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select GUIDEFRAME, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (5) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The guide frame is displayed on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

The image can be aligned horizontally using the control frame. The control frame is not recorded on the tape.

(1) Press the MENU button to display the menu. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the setting [ ], then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the GUIDEFRAME setting, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the ON setting, then press the dial. (5) Press the MENU button to clear the menu display. The guide frame is displayed on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - About digital transfer - 1

To clear the guide frame

Select OFF in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial or simply press DISPLAY.

Note

The guide frame indicates only a rough level.

The size and position of the guide frame do not affect the setting of the camcorder.

If you set GUIDEFRAME to ON

The other screen indicators are also displayed on the LCD screen.

To cancel the on-screen display of the control frame

Select OFF in item 4, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC button or the DISPLAY button.

Note

The control frame shows only a reference level. The size and position of the control frame do not affect the camcorder settings.

If the GUIDEFRAME parameter is set to ON

You can record a 16:9 wide picture to watch on a 16:9 wide-screen TV (16:9WIDE).

Black bands appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder during recording in 16:9WIDE mode [a]. The picture during playback on a normal TV [b] or on a wide-screen TV [c] is compressed in the widthwise direction. If you set the screen mode of the wide-screen TV to the full mode, you can watch pictures of normal images [d].

In standby mode, set 16:9WIDE to ON in [C] in the menu settings (p. 154).

Set the 16:9 WIDE parameter in the ON position in the menu settings (p. 154).

SONY DCR-VX2000E - If the GUIDEFRAME parameter is set to ON - 1

To cancel the wide mode

Set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings (p. 154).

In wide mode, you cannot select the following modes:

Old movie - Progressive mode

During recording

You cannot operate the wide mode function. When you cancel the wide mode, set your camcorder to the standby mode and then set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings.

You can fade the picture in or out to give your recording a professional appearance.

Fader Function

Follow the gradual appearance or disappearance of the image to take a professional photo.

STBY

REC

FADER

[a]SONY DCR-VX2000E - FADER - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - FADER - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - FADER - 3

SONY DCR-VX2000E - FADER - 4

OVERLAP*

SONY DCR-VX2000E - OVERLAP* - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - OVERLAP* - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - OVERLAP* - 3

SONY DCR-VX2000E - OVERLAP* - 4

WIPE*

SONY DCR-VX2000E - WIPE* - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - WIPE* - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - WIPE* - 3

SONY DCR-VX2000E - WIPE* - 4

DOT* (Random)

SONY DCR-VX2000E - DOT* (Random) - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - DOT* (Random) - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - DOT* (Random) - 3

[b]SONY DCR-VX2000E - DOT* (Random) - 4

  • Fade in only

STBY

REC

MONOTONE

When fading in, the picture gradually changes from black-and-white to colour.

When fading out, the picture gradually changes from colour to black-and-white.

MONOTONE

(1) When fading in [a]

In standby mode, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes.

When fading out [b]

In recording mode, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes.

The indicator changes as follows:

FADER → MONOTONE → OVERLAP →

WIPE → DOT → no indicator

The last selected fader mode is indicated first.

(2) Press START/STOP. After the fade in/out is carried out, your camcorder

automatically returns to the normal mode.

Press FADER until the indicator disappears.

Note

You cannot use the following functions while using the fader function, and vice versa:

  • Digital effect
  • Low lux mode of PROGRAM AE (Only in OVERLAP, WIPE, or DOT mode) -Tape Photo recording -Interval recording
  • Cut recording

When the OVERLAP, WIPE, or DOT indicator appears

Your camcorder automatically stores the image recorded on a tape. As the image is being stored, the fader indicator flashes fast, and the playback picture appears.

To cancel the FADER function

Press the FADER button until the indicator disappears.

Using special effects - Picture effect

You can digitally process images to obtain special effects like those in films or on TV.

NEG. ART [a]: The colour and brightness of the picture is reversed.

SEPIA : The picture gets sepia-toned.

B&W: The picture appears in monochrome (black-and-white).

SOLARIZE [b]: The light intensity is emphatic, and the picture looks like an illustration.

SLIM [c]: The picture expands vertically.

STRETCH [d]: The picture expands horizontally.

[a]SONY DCR-VX2000E - Using special effects - Picture effect - 1

[b]SONY DCR-VX2000E - Using special effects - Picture effect - 2

[c]SONY DCR-VX2000E - Using special effects - Picture effect - 3

[d]SONY DCR-VX2000E - Using special effects - Picture effect - 4

(1) In standby or recording mode, press PICTURE EFFECT. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired picture effect mode.

The picture effect indicator changes as follows:

NEG. ART ↔ SEPIA ↔ B&W ↔

SOLARIZE ↔ SLIM ↔ STRETCH

Using special effects - Picture effect

To cancel the picture effect function

Press PICTURE EFFECT so that the indicator disappears.

While using the picture effect function, you cannot select the old movie mode.

When you turn the power off, the picture effect function will be automatically cancelled.

When PROG. SCAN is set to ON in the menu settings

You cannot select SLIM and STRETCH.

No special effects - image effect

To cancel the picture effect function

Press PICTURE EFFECT so that the indicator disappears.

While using the picture effect function

You cannot select the old movie mode.

Using special effects - Digital effect

You can add special effects to recorded pictures using the various digital functions. The sound is recorded normally.

STILL

You can record a still image so that it is superimposed on a moving picture.

FLASH (FLASH MOTION)

You can record still images successively at constant intervals.

LUMI. (LUMINANCEKEY)

You can swap a brighter area in a still image with a moving picture.

TRAIL

You can record the picture so that an incidental image like a trail is left.

OLD MOVIE

You can add an old movie type atmosphere to pictures. The black bands appear on the upper and lower of the screen to change the virtual screen size to the cinemascope size, and the picture effect is set to SEPIA.

Special effects - digital effect

You can add special effects to the recorded image using various digital functions. The recorded sound will be normal.

STILL

You can record a moving picture over a still image.

FLASH (FLASH MOTION)

You can record moving pictures sequentially at set intervals.

LUMI. (LUMINANCEKEY)

You can change the dark areas of a still image to a moving picture.

TRAIL

You can record an image with a trailing effect.

OLD MOVIE

You can shoot with an old movie effect. Black bars appear at the top and bottom of the screen to give the virtual screen the proportions of a movie screen, and the image effect is set to SEPIA.

STILL Still imageSONY DCR-VX2000E - OLD MOVIE - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - OLD MOVIE - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - OLD MOVIE - 3

SONY DCR-VX2000E - OLD MOVIE - 4

Moving pictureSONY DCR-VX2000E - OLD MOVIE - 5

LUMI. Still imageSONY DCR-VX2000E - OLD MOVIE - 6

SONY DCR-VX2000E - OLD MOVIE - 7

SONY DCR-VX2000E - OLD MOVIE - 8

SONY DCR-VX2000E - OLD MOVIE - 9

Moving pictureSONY DCR-VX2000E - OLD MOVIE - 10

(1) In standby or recording mode, press DIGITAL EFFECT. The digital effect indicator appears. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired digital effect mode. The digital effect indicator changes as follows: STILL ↔ FLASH ↔ LUMI. ↔ TRAIL ↔ OLD MOVIE (3) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The indicator lights up and the bar appears. In STILL and LUMI modes, the still image is stored in memory. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect.

Items to be adjusted

STILLThe rate of the still image you want to superimpose on the moving picture
FLASHThe interval of flash motion
LUMI.The colour scheme of the area in the still image which is to be swapped with a moving picture
TRAILThe time until the incidental image vanishes
OLD MOVIENo adjustment necessary

The longer the bar on the screen, the stronger the digital effect. The bar appears in the following modes: STILL, FLASH, LUMI and TRAIL.

No special effects - special effect

Using special effects - Digital effect

To cancel the digital effect

Press DIGITAL EFFECT. The digital effect indicator disappears.

Notes

  • The following functions do not work in digital effect mode: -Fader
  • Low lux mode of PROGRAM AE -Tape Photo recording
  • Shutter speed (1/25 or smaller) adjustment
  • The following functions do not work in old movie mode:
  • Wide mode
  • Picture effect
  • PROGRAM AE
  • Spot light mode
  • Shutter speed adjustment

When you turn the power off, the digital effect function will be automatically cancelled.

Canceling the digital effect

To cancel the digital effect

Press the DIGITAL EFFECT button.

The digital effect indicator disappears.

Note

During the digital effect, the following functions do not work:

-Fader -Low light mode -PROGRAM AE -Photo shooting -Shutter speed adjustment (1/25 and below)

During the old movie mode, the following functions do not work:

-Wide screen mode -Picture effect -PROGRAM AE -Projector light mode -Shutter speed adjustment

Power off

Shooting with manual adjustment

Under normal conditions, this unit automatically makes various adjustments as it shoots. However, you can adjust the following functions manually to suit your preference.

Functions you can adjust by setting the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position

Brightness (exposure), shutter speed, white balance, and PROGRAM AE

Functions you can adjust in menu settings Deactivating the SteadyShot

Functions you can adjust by using other selectors/rings

ND filter, zebra pattern, focus, and zoom

The following describes how to adjust all the functions mentioned above except white balance (p. 70), PROGRAM AE (p. 77), focus (p. 81), and zoom (p. 29).

AUTO LOCK selector

Set the selector as shown below to maintain or release the settings of the functions.

Shooting with manual adjustment

Under normal conditions, this unit automatically performs various adjustments during shooting. However, depending on your preferences, you can manually adjust the following functions.

Functions that can be adjusted by setting the AUTO LOCK selector to the center position (automatic adjustment off)

Aperture (exposure), shutter speed, white balance, and PROGRAM AE

Functions that can be adjusted in the menu settings

Deactivating the SteadyShot function

Functions that can be adjusted using other selectors/rings: ND filter, zebra pattern, focus, and zoom

Select this position to let the unit adjust all the functions automatically.

HOLD [b]

Select this position after setting the functions manually to maintain the settings.

AUTO LOCK [a]

Select this position to let the device automatically perform the settings of all functions.

HOLD [b]

After manual adjustment, select this position to keep the settings you have made.

Shooting with manual adjustment

Manual position (AUTO LOCK release) [c] Select this position to adjust the functions listed above manually.

If you use the video flash light (not supplied)

We recommend that you set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK.

Note

When you manually adjust the exposure during backlight or spot light mode, the backlight or spot light function will be automatically cancelled.

Adjusting exposure

Adjust the exposure manually under the following cases.

The background is too bright (back lighting) - Insufficient light: most of the picture is dark - Bright subject and dark background To record the darkness faithfully

Shooting with manual adjustment

Manual adjustment (AUTO LOCK release) [c]

Select this item to manually adjust the functions listed above.

For use with the video light (not supplied)

It is recommended to set the AUTO LOCK selector to the AUTO LOCK position.

Note

When manually adjusting the exposure, the backlight and spotlight functions are automatically turned off.

Exposure adjustment

Perform manual exposure adjustment in the following cases.

  • The background is too bright (backlighting)
  • Insufficient light: a significant part of the image is dark, and the subject is dark against a bright object; it is necessary to shoot exactly the dark image

Shooting with manual adjustment

(1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while the camcorder is in standby, recording, or memory mode. (2) Press EXPOSURE. The exposure indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (3) Turn the EXPOSURE dial to adjust the exposure. As you turn the dial, the iris value changes between OPEN and CLOSE and the gain value changes between 0 dB and 18dB. To brighten the picture, adjust the level to the + side.

Shooting with manual adjustment

(1) While the camcorder is in standby, recording, or memory mode, set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center position (auto lock release). (2) Press the EXPOSURE button. The exposure indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (3) Turn the EXPOSURE dial to adjust the exposure. As you turn the dial, the iris value changes between OPEN (open) and CLOSE (closed), and the gain value changes between 0 dB and 18 dB. To make the image brighter, move the level to the + side.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Shooting with manual adjustment - 1

To return to automatic exposure mode

Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK or press EXPOSURE. The exposure indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen.

If you press PROGRAM AE when adjusting the exposure manually

The exposure comes back to automatic adjustment again.

To return to automatic exposure mode

Set the AUTO LOCK switch to the AUTO LOCK position, then press the EXPOSURE button. The exposure indicator disappears from the LCD screen of the viewfinder.

If you press the PROGRAM AE button during manual exposure adjustment, the exposure switches back to automatic adjustment.

Adjusting the shutter speed

(1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while the camcorder is in standby, recording, or memory mode. (2) If the PROGRAM AE indicator is lit, press PROGRAM AE repeatedly until the indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen. (3) Press SHUTTER SPEED. The shutter speed indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired speed. The available shutter speed ranges from 1/3 to 1/10000. As you turn the dial, the shutter speed changes as follows:

1/3 ↔ 1/6 ↔ 1/12 ↔ 1/25 ↔ ... ↔ 1/3500 ↔ 1/6000 ↔ 1/10000

To increase the shutter speed, select a smaller setting (large value indicator on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder).

Shooting with manual adjustment

Adjusting the shutter speed

(1) While the camcorder is in standby, recording, or memory mode, set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position. (2) If the PROGRAM AE indicator is lit, press the PROGRAM AE button repeatedly until the indicator disappears from the LCD screen or viewfinder. (3) Press the SHUTTER SPEED button. The shutter speed indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired speed. The shutter speed can be set in the range from 1/3 to 1/10000. As you turn the dial, the shutter speed changes as follows: 1/3 ↔ 1/6 ↔ 1/12 ↔ 1/25 ↔ ... ↔ 1/3500 ↔ 1/6000 ↔ 1/10000. To increase the shutter speed, select a smaller setting (the indicator shows a larger value on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder).

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Adjusting the shutter speed - 1

To return to automatic shutter speed mode

Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK or press SHUTTER SPEED. The shutter speed indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen.

To return to automatic shutter speed control mode

Set the AUTO LOCK switch to the AUTO LOCK position, then press the SHUTTER SPEED button. The shutter speed indicator disappears from the LCD screen when the release button is pressed.

Shooting with manual adjustment

When shooting at slow shutter speed At slow shutter speed, automatic focus may be lost. Use a tripod and adjust the focus manually.

When shooting under fluorescent light or light bulbs

When shooting under fluorescent light or light bulbs, a rare phenomenon may happen in which the screen lights up brightly depending on the shutter speed (Flicker phenomenon).

If you set the shutter speed value to 1/25 or smaller

You cannot use the spot light (p. 33) and digital effect (p. 58) functions.

Using the ND filter

Using the ND filter (the ND filter 1 setting corresponds to 1/4 of the quantity of light and the ND filter 2 setting corresponds to 1/32 of the quantity of light), you can record a picture clearly by adjusting light amounts, even if you shoot under too bright conditions.

Shooting with manual adjustment

When shooting at a low shutter speed, the camera may not be able to focus automatically. Use the manual focus ring to set the focus manually.

Bo Bpem CbEMKn PnO OcBeSeHn IaMpaMn DHeBHOr CBeTa NIN IaMpaMn HaKaIbNAHn MOKeT BO3HKNHYb peKOE ABLeHne, Pn KOTOpOM 3KpaH rPKO BCnbIXNBaET B 3aBNCIMOCtN OT CKOPoCTN 3aTBopa (MepuHne).

EcIn yCTaHOBHeA BeINuHa cKOpocTn 3aTBopa,paBna1/25 nIi HnKe

HeIb3a 6yIeT nCnONb3ObaTb fynKcIM npoxKeTOpHoRO oCBeueHnra (ctp. 33) n uΦpOBoro 3ΦΦeKaTa (ctp. 58).

IcnoJIb3OBAHnE ΦnJIbTp a ND

IcnoIb3yIΦnIbTpND (no3nIa IΦnIbTp a ND cooTBeTCTByET 1/4 KOJIuYeCTBa CBeta, a no3nIa 2ΦnIbTp a ND cooTBeTCTByET 1/32 KOJIuYeCTBa CBeta), MOXHO OTeTJINBO CHaTb KapTHKy, KOTopar npn 3tOM He BbIeT n3 φokyca, 6byuH npK OcBceHHO.

When the ND1 or ND2 indicator flashes on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder

The ND filter is necessary. When ND 1 flashes, set the ND FILTER selector to 1 so that the ND 1 indicator lights up on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. When ND 2 flashes, set the ND FILTER selector to 2 so that the ND 2 indicator lights up on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

When ND OFF flashes on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder

The ND filter is not necessary. Set the ND FILTER selector to OFF so that the indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen. The ND filter is now deactivated.

CbeMka c nCNoJIb3OBAHnEM pyHOn peryIInpOBKn

KordaHa3kpaHe KKД uInu B BuOnCKaTeJI MraeT uHdNkaTop ND1 uIn ND2

Tpe6yETcHnIbTp ND. Korda miraet nHdkaTOp ND 1, yCTaHOBtene nepeKIOuHTeNBND FILTER B nOJoxKeHne 1, yTO6bHa n3KpaHe KKn nIn B vDIOUcKaTeNe 3aRopeJIcNnHdkaTOp ND 1. Korda miraet nHdkaTOp ND 2, yCTaHOBtene nepeKIOuHTeNBND FILTER B nOJoxKeHne 2, yTO6bHa n3KpaHe KKn nIn B vDIOUcKaTeNe 3aRopeJIcNnHdkaTOp ND 2.

Korda mnaeT nHnkaTop ND OFF ha əkpaHe XKKД nIb B VbdoNcKaTeIe

ФильТР ND He Huxhen. YcTaHOBnTe nepeKluOuATEnelb ND FILTER B noLoXeHne OFF,чTO6bl NcYe3 nHdNkaTOp Ha 3KpaHe XXKД nII INB BnDOnCKaTeIe. ФильТР ND Tepeb OTKluOyen.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Korda mnaeT nHnkaTop ND OFF ha əkpaHe XKKД nIb B VbdoNcKaTeIe - 1

Notes

  • If you set the ND FILTER selector to another position during recording, the picture may be blurred or audio noise may occur. We recommend that you check the position of the ND FILTER selector before shooting.
  • When shooting a too bright object, diffraction off the small aperture may cause slight offset in focusing. This phenomenon is quite common with the use of a video camera recorder. Using the ND filter will reduce the influence of such phenomenon, and you can attain a better shooting condition.

If you use the video flash light (not supplied)

Set the ND FILTER selector to OFF when you use the flash.

  • If the switch ND FILTER is accidentally moved to another position, the image may become blurry or noise may appear. It is recommended to check the position of the ND FILTER switch before sending.
  • When shooting a too bright object, diffraction at a small aperture may cause a slight shift in focusing. This is quite a common phenomenon when using a video camera. When using the ND filter, this phenomenon becomes less noticeable, and more favorable shooting conditions are achieved.

When using the video flash (not supplied)

If you use the flash, set the ND FILTER selector to the OFF position.

Shooting with the zebra pattern

You can set the camcorder to display a zebra pattern (diagonal stripes) in the portion of the picture on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder with a subject whose brightness exceeds a certain level. When the ZEBRA selector is set to 100, the portion of the picture where zebra pattern appears is an area of high brightness and overexposure. You can check the picture level of a subject by displaying the zebra pattern. Use the zebra pattern as a guide for adjusting the exposure and shutter speed so that you can get the desired picture.

Set the ZEBRA selector to 70 or 100 in standby or memory mode.

Shooting with manual adjustment

Shooting with the zebra pattern

You can adjust the camera to display a striped pattern (vertical stripes) in the part of the image on the screen where brightness exceeds a certain level. When the ZEBRA switch is set to position 100, the striped pattern is displayed in areas with high brightness. You can check the brightness level of an object by displaying the striped pattern. The striped pattern is used as a guide for adjusting the necessary exposure and shutter speed to obtain the desired image.

Set the ZEBRA selector to 70 or 100 in the standby or memory mode.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Shooting with the zebra pattern - 1

SettingMeaning
70The zebra pattern appears in the portion of the picture on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder with a subject whose brightness is about 70%.
100The zebra pattern appears in the portion of the picture on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder with a subject whose brightness exceeds more than 100%.
OFFThe zebra pattern does not appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

To erase the zebra pattern

Set the ZEBRA selector to OFF.

Note on shooting with the zebra pattern Even though you see the zebra pattern on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, the zebra pattern is not recorded.

When the SteadyShot function is working, the camcorder compensates for camera-shake. You can release the SteadyShot function when you do not need to use it. The indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. Do not use the SteadyShot function when shooting a stationary object with a tripod.

(1) Press MENU to display the menu in standby or memory mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select STEADYSHOT, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OFF, then press the dial. (5) Press MENU to erase the menu display.

Disabling the SteadyShot function

Korda stabilizes the image, the video camera compensates for shaking. This function is not required, it can be disabled. The *F indicator will appear on the screen or in the viewfinder. Do not use the stabilization function when shooting a stationary object with a tripod.

(1) Press the MENU button to display the menu. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the setting, then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the STEADYSHOT setting, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OFF, then press the dial. (5) Press the MENU button to remove the menu indication.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Disabling the SteadyShot function - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Disabling the SteadyShot function - 2

Shooting with manual adjustment

To activate the SteadyShot function again

Select ON in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

Notes on the SteadyShot function

  • The SteadyShot function will not correct excessive camera-shake.
  • If you use a tele conversion lens (not supplied) or a wide conversion lens (not supplied), these lens may influence the SteadyShot function.

Using the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial

To reactivate the steady shot function

Select ON in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

Notes on the steady shot function

The steady shot function cannot compensate for excessive camera shake. - Using a telephoto lens (not supplied) may affect the operation of the steady shot function.

Adjusting the white balance

White balance adjustment makes white subjects look white and allows more natural colour balance for camera recording. Normally, white balance is automatically adjusted. You can obtain better results by adjusting the white balance manually when lighting conditions change quickly or when recording outdoors: e.g., neon signs, fireworks.

(1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while the camcorder is in standby, recording, or memory mode. (2) Press WHT BAL. The white balance indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the appropriate white balance mode under the following conditions. As you turn the dial, the display changes as follows:

(One-push white balance) ↔ (Outdoor) ↔ (Indoor)

Adjusting the white balance

The white balance adjustment allows you to set the white balance for white objects to a more natural white balance when shooting. Normally, the white balance adjustment is performed automatically. Manual white balance adjustment allows you to get better results in cases where the lighting conditions change quickly or when shooting outdoors: for example, in high contrast or backlighting.

(1) While the camcorder is in standby, recording, or memory mode, set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position. (2) Press the WHT BAL button. The white balance indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the appropriate white balance mode under the following conditions. As you turn the dial, the display changes as follows: (One-push white balance) ↔ (Outdoor) ↔ (Indoor)

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Adjusting the white balance - 1

Adjusting the white balance

IndicatorShooting conditions
(Outdoor)·Adjusting the white balance according to the light source. This operation is not available during recording. Follow the procedure described below to adjust the setting again.
·Recording a sunset/sunrise, just after sunset, just before sunrise, neon signs, or fireworks ·Under a colour matching fluorescent lamp
(Indoor)·Lighting condition changes quickly ·Too bright a place such as a photography studio ·Under sodium lamps or mercury lamps

If you have selected [2] in step 3

When you set the white balance to one-push white balance mode, the setting is locked and maintained even if lighting conditions change. You can achieve recording with natural colours without the image being affected by ambient light.

(With the indicator on the screen)

(1) Shoot a white object such as paper fully. (2) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

The indicator flashes quickly. When the white balance has been adjusted and stored in the memory, the indicator stops flashing. The setting will be maintained even if the battery is detached.

To return to automatic adjustment

Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK or press WHT BAL. The white balance indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen.

Adjusting the white balance

If you have selected the setting

SONY DCR-VX2000E - If you have selected the setting - 1

If the white balance adjustment mode is set by pressing, the selected setting is fixed and maintained until the shooting conditions change. As a result, you get images with natural colors, and the surrounding light does not affect the image. (When the indicator is on the screen)

(1) Shoot only a white object, such as white paper. (2) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The indicator flashes quickly. After the white balance is adjusted and stored in memory, the indicator stops flashing. The adjustment is maintained even after the battery is disconnected.

To switch back to automatic adjustment

Set the AUTO LOCK switch to the AUTO LOCK position and press the WHT BAL button. The white balance indicator disappears from the LCD screen and in the viewfinder.

Notes on white balance

  • When you shoot with studio lighting or video lighting, use the (indoor) mode.
  • When you shoot with fluorescent lighting, readjust the white balance using the 1 (one-push white balance) mode, or use the automatic white balance mode. If you use the 杂 (indoor) mode, white balance may not be adjusted appropriately.

Shooting when lighting conditions have changed

  • When lighting conditions have changed, readjust the white balance while the camcorder is in standby mode.
  • In automatic white balance mode, point your camcorder at a white subject for about 10 seconds after setting the POWER switch to CAMERA to get a better adjustment when:
  • You detach the battery for replacement.
  • You bring your camcorder outdoors from the interior of a house, or vice versa.

If the indicator does not stop flashing after you press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, the white balance cannot be set. Use the automatic white balance mode.

Adjusting recording level manually - Sound recording level

You can adjust the recording sound level. Use headphones to monitor the sound when you adjust it.

Setting up the menu

(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select MIC LEVEL, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select MANUAL, then press the dial. (6) Press MENU to erase the menu display.

Adjusting the recording level

(7) Press AUDIO LEVEL to display the recording level adjustment display in standby or recording mode. (8) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the recording level.

Recording level - sound recording level

Set the sound recording level. Use the headphones while adjusting the sound.

Setting up the menu

(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR. (2) Press the MENU button to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the setting, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the MIC LEVEL setting, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the MANUAL setting, then press the dial. (6) Press the MENU button to remove the menu indication.

Adjusting the recording level

(7) Press the AUDIO LEVEL button to display the recording level adjustment screen in recording standby mode. (8) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the recording level.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Adjusting the recording level - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Adjusting the recording level - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Adjusting the recording level - 3

Adjusting recording level manually - Sound recording level

[a] Recording level meter [b] Decreases the recording level [c] Increases the recording level

To clear the recording level adjustment display

Press AUDIO LEVEL again.

To adjust the recording level automatically

Select AUTO in step 5, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

Notes on the manual adjustment

  • The recording level setting is retained for about five minutes after removing the battery.
  • The recording level indicator appears at the lower-right on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

The sound input through the AUDIO L/R jacks or DVI IN/OUT jack

You cannot adjust the recording level.

When MIC LEVEL is set to AUTO

You cannot adjust the recording level, however, the recording level adjustment display is displayed.

Manual recording level adjustment - Sound recording level

[a] Decreases the recording level [b] Decreases the recording level [c] Increases the recording level

To cancel the recording level adjustment screen display

Press the AUDIO LEVEL button again.

To automatically adjust the recording level

Set AUTO in step 5, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

Regarding the manual adjustment

  • The recording level setting is retained for approximately 5 minutes after the battery is disconnected.
  • The recording level indicator is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

Input audio signal via the AUDIO L/R jacks or DV IN/OUT.

The recording level cannot be adjusted.

When the MIC LEVEL command is set to AUTO

The recording level adjustment is not possible, but the recording level adjustment screen is displayed.

Presetting the adjustment for picture quality - Custom preset

You can preset the camcorder to record the picture with the desired picture quality. When presetting, adjust the picture by shooting a subject and checking the picture displayed on a TV using the menu settings. (1) Press CUSTOM PRESET to display the CUSTOM PRESET menu in standby or memory mode. (2) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select SET, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the selected item, then press the dial. (7) Press CUSTOM PRESET.

The CUSTOM PRESET menu disappears and the indicator CP appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

Items to be adjusted

Item/Злем entMeaning/Ha3нauениeAdjustment value/Belушина ретулировки
COLOUR LVLColour intensity/ИntehсиьhoeчыцьetoBDecreases colour intensity ↔ Increases colour intensity/Уменшениe ИntehсиьhoeчыцьetoA ↔Уменшениe ИntehсиьhoeчыцьetoA
SHARPNESSSharpness/РeshкостьSofter ↔ Sharper/Сглаженhoe ↔ Pe3коe
WB SHIFTWhite balance/Баланс белогоBluish ↔ Reddish/Синий ↔ Красный
AE SHIFTBrightness/ЯркOSTь-4 ↔ +4
AGC LIMITAuto Gain-limit/АвTomатиеслое ограличениe усilенья6 dB/12 dB/OFF/6 dB/12 dB/OFF
RESETSets items above to the default settings./Установka для вишикуа зааньix злем entobьзни по умочанию.

To cancel using the custom preset

Select OFF in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

To return to the standard setting

Select OK from the RESET item in step 5, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. To cancel, select RETURN, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

To check the custom preset setting

Press CUSTOM PRESET while the camcorder is in standby, recording or memory mode.

The custom preset setting appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

Once you adjust AE shift

You can adjust the brightness of the picture according to recording circumstances or objects.

About the AGC Limit

When adjusting the exposure manually, the level of the gain is up to 18 dB (OFF).

When you preset the desired picture quality in CAMERA or memory mode

The preset is only available in each mode you preset. If you want to use a preset both in CAMERA and memory modes, you have to preset in each mode.

You can select from five PROGRAM AE (Auto Exposure) modes to suit your shooting situation, referring to the following.

Selecting the best mode

Select a proper PROGRAM AE mode referring to the following description.

Using the PROGRAM AE function

Select OIN from the shooting modes PROGRAM AE (automatic exposure) according to the shooting conditions, following the instructions below.

Select the required program AE mode based on the following description.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Using the PROGRAM AE function - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Using the PROGRAM AE function - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Using the PROGRAM AE function - 3

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Using the PROGRAM AE function - 4

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Using the PROGRAM AE function - 5

AE A: Aperture priority mode

Selecting the aperture to determine the desired depth of field. Gain and shutter speed are automatically set in combination with the aperture value to maintain appropriate exposure.

AE S: Shutter speed priority mode

Selecting the shutter speed manually. The exposure value changes in accordance with the selected shutter speed.

Sports lesson mode

Capturing high-speed action in sports such as golf or tennis

Sunset & Moon mode

Recording sunset, night views, fireworks or neon signs

Low lux mode

For recording a subject in insufficient light. Subject becomes bright.

AE A: Aperture priority mode

The diagram for determining the required fuel consumption. The closing speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the set value of the diagram for obtaining the required exposure.

AE S: Shutter speed priority mode

Shutter speed priority mode. The exposure value changes in accordance with the selected shutter speed.

Program AE modes

For shooting fast-moving subjects, for example, during golf or tennis swings.

C: Sunset & Moon mode

For shooting sunsets, moonlit scenes, fireworks, and neon signs.

: Low lux mode

For shooting subjects in low light. The subject becomes brighter.

Using the PROGRAM AE function

(1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while the camcorder is in standby, recording, or memory mode. (2) Press PROGRAM AE. The PROGRAM AE indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired PROGRAM AE mode. The PROGRAM AE mode changes as follows: Aperture priority mode ↔ Shutter speed priority mode ↔ Sports lesson mode ↔ Sunset & Moon mode ↔ Low lux mode. When you select the aperture priority mode or the shutter speed priority mode, press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. (4) In aperture priority mode (AE A) or shutter speed priority mode (AE S), turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired aperture value (F value) or shutter speed. Aperture priority mode:

Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired aperture value. As you turn the dial, the F value changes between F1.6 and F11.

For a smaller aperture, select a higher value. The gain and shutter speed change in accordance with the selected aperture value.

Shutter speed priority mode:

Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired shutter speed. As you turn the dial, shutter speed changes between 1/50 and 1/10000.

For a faster shutter speed, select a smaller value indicator on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. The gain and aperture values change in accordance with the selected shutter speed.

Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK or press PROGRAM AE. The PROGRAM AE indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen.

Notes

  • In sports lesson mode, you cannot take close-ups. This is because your camcorder is set to focus only on subjects in the middle to far distance.
  • In sunset & moon mode, your camcorder is set to focus only on distant subjects.
  • The old movie mode and the shutter speed adjustment do not work in PROGRAM AE mode.
  • The following functions do not work in low lux mode:
  • Digital effect
  • Overlap -Wipe
  • Dot
  • Spot light mode
  • While shooting in memory mode, the low lux and sports lesson modes do not work. (The indicator flashes.)

If you are recording under a discharge tube such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium lamp or mercury lamp

Flickering or changes in colour may occur in sports lesson mode. If this happens, turn the PROGRAM AE function off.

Even if the PROGRAM AE function is selected

You can adjust the exposure.

When you focus in telephoto

You cannot choose F1.6 and F2.

About the depth of field

The depth of field is the in-focus range, measured from the distance behind a subject to the distance in front. The depth of field can vary with the iris (F value) and the focal length. Lowering the F value (large iris) reduces the depth of field. Raising the F value (small iris) provides a larger depth of field. Zooming in telephoto position offers a smaller depth of field while the depth of field in the wide-angle position is greater.

The depth of fieldShallowDeep
IrisNear open (Low F value)Near close (High F value)
ZoomTelephoto (T)Wide (W)

Using the PROGRAM AE function

If shooting is performed using different types of lamps, for example, daylight lamps, incandescent lamps, or mercury lamps, flickering or changes in brightness may occur. If this happens, turn the PROGRAM AE function off.

If the PROGRAM AE function is selected

You can gain better results by manually adjusting the focus in the following cases:

  • The autofocus mode is not effective when shooting
  • subjects through glass coated with water droplets
  • horizontal stripes
  • subjects with little contrast with backgrounds such as walls and sky
  • When you want to change the focus from a subject in the foreground to a subject in the background
  • Shooting a stationary subject when using a tripod

You can also get good results using manual focus in the following cases:

- When the autofocus mode is ineffective for shooting - Subjects through glass covered with condensation - Horizontal stripes - Subjects with low contrast against a background such as a wall or sky - When you want to change the focus from a subject in the foreground to a subject in the background - When shooting a stationary subject with a tripod

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Using the PROGRAM AE function - 1

(1) Slide FOCUS down to MANUAL in standby, recording, or memory mode. The indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder in recording, standby, or memory mode. (2) Turn the focus ring to sharpen the focus.

(1) Slide the FOCUS switch to the MANUAL position when the camera is in standby, recording, or playback mode. In standby, recording, or playback mode, the indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (2) Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Using the PROGRAM AE function - 2

To return to the autofocus mode

Slide FOCUS up to AUTO to turn off the indicator.

To focus in infinity

Slide FOCUS to INFINITY. The indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. This function is useful when the nearer subject is focused automatically, even though you want to focus on a faraway subject.

To shoot with auto focusing momentarily

Press PUSH AUTO.

The auto focus functions while you are pressing PUSH AUTO.

Use this button to focus on one subject and then another with smooth focusing.

When you release PUSH AUTO, manual focusing resumes.

To obtain the correct focus

First, focus on a subject manually with the zoom set toward the "T" (telephoto) side, then adjust the zoom by pressing the "W" side of the lever gradually.

When you shoot close to the subject

Focus at the end of the "W" (wide-angle) position.

changes as follows:

when recording a distant subject. when the subject is too close to focus on.

You can make a time-lapse recording by setting the camcorder to automatically record and standby sequentially. You can achieve an excellent recording for flowering, emergence, etc., with this function.

ExampleSONY DCR-VX2000E - When you shoot close to the subject - 1

[a] Recording time [b] Waiting time

Recording at intervals

You can make a recording with the effect of accelerated motion by setting the camcorder so that it sequentially records and then switches to standby mode. With this function, you can make a unique recording of the blooming of a flower, the emergence of shoots, etc.

ExampleSONY DCR-VX2000E - Recording at intervals - 1

[a] Recording time [b] Waiting time

(1) Press MENU to display the menu in standby mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [C], then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select INT. REC, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select SET, then press the dial. (5) Set INTERVAL and REC TIME.

① Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select INTERVAL, then press the dial. ② Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired interval time, then press the dial.

The time: 30SEC ↔ 1MIN ↔ 5MIN ↔ 10MIN

③ Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select REC TIME, then press the dial. ④ Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired recording time, then press the dial.

The time: 0.5SEC ↔ 1SEC ↔ 1.5SEC ↔ 2SEC

⑤ Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select RETURN, then press the dial twice.

(1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC knob to display the time setting. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC knob to select the setting [ ], then press the knob. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC knob to select the INT. REC setting, then press the knob. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC knob to select the SET setting, then press the knob.

(5) Set the INTERVAL and REC TIME parameters.

① Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select INTERVAL, then press the dial. ② Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired interval time, then press the dial. Time: 30SEC ↔ 1MIN ↔ 5MIN ↔ 10MIN. ③ Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select REC TIME, then press the dial. ④ Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired recording time, then press the dial. Time: 0.5SEC ↔ 1SEC ↔ 1.5SEC ↔ 2SEC. ⑤ Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select RETURN, then press the dial twice.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Recording at intervals - 2

5

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 5 - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 5 - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 5 - 3

1

CAMERA SET INT. REC INTERVAL 30SEC REC TIME RETURN

2

CAMERA SET INT. REC INTERVAL 30SEC REC TIME 1MIN RETURN 5MIN

3

CAMERA SET INT. REC INTERVAL [REC TIME] 0.5SEC RETURN

4

CAMERA SET INT. REC INTERVAL REC TIME 0.5SEC RETURN 1SEC 1.5SEC 2SEC

(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (7) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The interval recording indicator flashes. (8) Press START/STOP to start interval recording. The interval recording indicator lights up.

(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the ON setting, then press the dial. (7) Press the MENU button to delete the menu indication. The interval recording indicator lights up. (8) Press the START/STOP button to start recording with intervals. The interval recording indicator lights up.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 4 - 1

7 MENUSONY DCR-VX2000E - 4 - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 4 - 3

8SONY DCR-VX2000E - 4 - 4

6SONY DCR-VX2000E - 4 - 5

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 4 - 6

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 4 - 7

CAMERA SET D ZOOM

G16:9WIDE

STADYSHOT

FRAMEREC

INT. REC ON

RETURN

STC

To cancel the interval recording

  • Set INT. REC to OFF in the menu settings.
  • Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), VCR or MEMORY.

To stop the interval recording momentarily and perform normal recording

Press START/STOP. You can perform normal recording only once. To cancel the normal recording, press START/STOP again.

To cancel the interval recording

  • Set the INT. REC B switch to OFF in the device settings.
  • Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), VCR or MEMORY.

To instantly stop recording with intervals, perform a normal recording.

To make a high-voltage recording, press the START/STOP button. This can only be done once. To make another high-voltage recording, press the START/STOP button again.

Note on interval recording

You cannot do interval recording in memory mode.

On recording time

There may be a discrepancy in recording time of up to +/- 6 frames from the selected time.

Even if you press INDEX MARK during interval recording

You cannot mark an index.

Notes on interval recording

Interval recording is not possible in memory playback.

Recording time

The actual recording time may differ from the selected time by +/- 6 frames.

This is an OCR error and should be removed.

You cannot mark an index.

Frame by frame recording - Cut recording

You can make a recording with a stop-motion animated effect using cut recording. To create this effect, alternately move the subject a little and make a cut recording. We recommend that you use a tripod, and operate the camcorder using the Remote Commander after step 6.

(1) Press MENU to display the menu in standby mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select C, then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select FRAME REC, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (5) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The FRAME REC indicator lights up. (6) Press START/STOP to start cut recording. The camcorder makes a recording for about six frames, and returns to recording standby. (7) Move the subject, and repeat step 6.

Frame by frame recording - Cut recording

To cancel the cut recording

  • Set FRAME REC to OFF in the menu settings.
  • Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), VCR, or MEMORY.

Notes on cut recording

  • The last recorded cut is longer than other cuts.
  • The proper remaining tape time is not indicated if you use this function continuously.
  • You cannot mark an index during cut recording.

Cut recording - recording with cut marks

To cancel cut recording

  • Set the FRAME REC command
  • to the OFF position in the menu settings.
  • Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), VCR, or MEMORY.

Replacement regarding records with mounting brackets

- The last recorded cut is longer than other cuts. The remaining tape time is not indicated correctly if this function is used frequently. - During cut recording, it is impossible to record index marks.

If you mark an index at the scene you want to search for, you can easily search for the scene later (p. 93).

In recording mode [a]:

Press INDEX MARK.

The "INDEX MARK" indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder for seven seconds and the index is marked after the indicator disappears.

In standby mode [b]:

Press INDEX MARK.

The "INDEX STBY" indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. And when you press START/STOP to start recording, the "INDEX STBY" indicator changes to "INDEX MARK" and after the indicator disappears, the index marking is complete.

The camcorder starts index-marking at the 11th frame from the recording start point. An index signal will be recorded on cassette memory about 0.3 sec, and on a tape about five seconds.

You can mark an index in VCR mode (p. 129).

Index marking

If you record an index signal for a specific scene, you can easily find it later (p. 93).

In recording mode [a]:

Press the INDEX MARK button.

The "INDEX MARK" indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder for about seven seconds. The index signal will be recorded after the indicator disappears.

In standby mode [b]:

Press the INDEX MARK key. The "INDEX STBY" indicator will appear on the display. When you press the START/STOP key to begin indexing, the "INDEX STBY" indicator will be replaced by the "INDEX MARK" indicator, and when it disappears, the index mark setting is complete.

The index is set on the 11th frame from the start of recording. Indices are recorded to the cassette memory approximately within 0.3 seconds, and to the memory card about 5 seconds.

You can record it in VCR mode (p.129).

[a]SONY DCR-VX2000E - Index marking - 1

INDEX MARKSONY DCR-VX2000E - Index marking - 2

[b]SONY DCR-VX2000E - Index marking - 3

To cancel index marking

Press INDEX MARK again in standby mode.

Notes on the index

  • Index marks are recorded during recording, you cannot mark an index after recording.
  • Index signals will be recorded both on the tape and on cassette memory. If you use cassettes without cassette memory or the cassette memory is full, the signals will be recorded only on the tape.
  • When you record over the recorded tape and mark an index on the tape, we recommend that you clear all data in the cassette memory before marking an index.

To cancel index marking

Hakmnte KhoNky INDEX MARK eue pa3, KOrda KaMepa HaxoDITcB peKIme OXuDaHn.

Notes on the index

  • Index marks are set during recording; recording with an index mark is impossible.
  • Index signals will be recorded both on the tape and on cassette memory. If you use cassettes without cassette memory or the cassette memory is full, the signals will be recorded only on the tape. When you record over the recorded tape and mark an index on the tape, we recommend that you clear all data in the cassette memory before marking an index.

- Advanced Playback Operations - Quickly locating a scene using the zero set memory function

Using the zero set memory function, your camcorder rewinds or advances the tape to locate the desired scene, and the searching automatically stops at the scene having a tape counter value of "0:00:00." You can do this with the Remote Commander.

(1) In playback mode, press DISPLAY if the counter is not on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (2) Press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point you want to locate later. The tape counter shows "0:00:00" and the ZERO SET MEMORY indicator flashes. (3) Press when you want to stop playback. (4) Press ◀ to rewind the tape to the tape counter's zero point. The tape stops automatically when the tape counter reaches approximately zero. The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator disappears and the time code appears. (5) Press ▶. Playback starts.

Improved playback operations - Quick scene search using the zero set memory function

With the zero set memory function, the camcorder can be set to rewind and stop automatically at a desired scene, where the tape counter shows 0:00:00. This can be done using the remote control.

(1) Press the DISPLAY button repeatedly if the counter is not displayed on the LCD screen or viewfinder. (2) Find the ZERO SET MEMORY button at the location that needs to be found later. The counter display will become "0:00:00", and the ZERO SET MEMORY indicator will start flashing. (3) Press the button when it is necessary to stop playback. (4) Press the button for fast rewind of the tape back to the zero point of the tape counter. The tape will stop automatically when the counter reaches the zero mark. The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator will disappear, and the time code will appear. (5) Press the ▶ button. Playback will start.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Improved playback operations - Quick scene search using the zero set memory function - 1

Notes

  • When you press ZERO SET MEMORY again before rewinding the tape, the zero set memory function will be cancelled.
  • There may be a discrepancy of several seconds from the time code.

Notes.

  • Before starting the reverse winding of the tape, the ZERO SET MEMORY function will be applied.
  • There may be a discrepancy of several seconds between the time code and the actual time.

Quickly locating a scene using the zero set memory function

When there is a blank portion between pictures on a tape

The zero set memory function may not work.

ZERO SET MEMORY functions also in standby mode

When you insert a scene in the middle of a recorded tape, press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point you want to end the insertion.

Rewind the tape to the insert start point, and start recording. Recording stops automatically at the tape counter zero point. Your camcorder returns to standby mode.

QUICK INDEX SEARCH USING THE ZERO SET MEMORY FUNCTION

If there is an unrecorded section between recorded images on the tape,

the ZERO SET MEMORY function may not work.

The ZERO SET MEMORY function also works in standby mode.

You can automatically search for the point where an index is marked and start playback from that point (Index search). Use a tape with cassette memory for convenience. Use the Remote Commander for this operation. Use this function to check where indexes are marked or to edit the tape at each sequence where the index is marked.

Searching for the index point using cassette memory

You can use this function only when playing back a tape with cassette memory (p. 210).

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Set CM SEARCH in to ON in the menu settings (p. 154). The default setting is ON. (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the index search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH → TITLE SEARCH → DATE SEARCH → PHOTO SEARCH → PHOTO SCAN → no indicator (4) Press < or > on the Remote Commander to select the index point for playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playing back at the selected index point.

Searching for a recording by index - Index search

To stop searching

Press ■.

In the 00 mark

  • The bar in the [00] mark indicates the present point on the tape. The × mark in the 001 indicates the actual point you are trying to search for.

If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions

The index search function may not work correctly.

If you mark an index onto an external input signal

"LINE" appears in the CH column.

The index of the recording start point when recorded from external audio equipment

The index mark is not recorded in cassette memory when recorded from external audio equipment. If you want to search for the index point, set CM SEARCH to OFF in the menu settings and search for the index point without cassette memory.

Searching for the index point without using cassette memory

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Set CM SEARCH in to OFF in the menu settings (p. 154). If using a tape without cassette memory, skip this step. (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the index search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH → DATE SEARCH → PHOTO SEARCH → PHOTO SCAN → no indicator (4) Press ◄◄ on the Remote Commander to search for the previous index point or press ►► on the Remote Commander to search for the next index point. Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the selected index point. Each time you press ◄◄ or ►► your camcorder searches for the previous or next index point.

To stop searching

Press ■.

Recording by index

-Search by index

To stop searching

Press the button

In the indicator

- The position indicator 00 shows the current location on the tape. - The mark in the indicator shows the current position of the search.

If the tape has an unrecorded portion between recorded portions, the INDEX function may not work correctly.

If the index mark is recorded on an external input signal

In the column, the indication “LINE” appears.

Setting the index mark at the beginning of recording from an external device

When recording from an external device, the index mark is not recorded in the cassette memory. If you need to find the point where the index mark is set, set CM SEARCH to OFF in the menu settings and perform the index search without using the cassette memory.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title - Title search - 1

If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can search for the boundaries of recorded tape by title (Title search) (p. 210). Use the Remote Commander for this operation.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Set CM SEARCH in to ON in the menu settings (p. 154). The default setting is ON. (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the title search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH → TITLE SEARCH → DATE SEARCH → PHOTO SEARCH → PHOTO SCAN → no indicator (4) Press or on the Remote Commander to select the title for playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the scene having the title that you selected.

Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title - Title search

To stop searching

Press ■.

If you use a tape without cassette memory. You cannot superimpose or search for a title.

In the 00 mark

  • The bar in the □ mark indicates the present point on the tape.
  • The x mark in the 0 indicates the actual point you are trying to search for.

If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions

The title search function may not work correctly.

You can automatically search for the point where the recording date changes and start playback from that point (Date search). Use a tape with cassette memory for convenience. Use the Remote Commander for this operation. Use this function to check where recording dates change or to edit the tape at each recording date.

Searching for the date using cassette memory

You can use this function only when playing back a tape with cassette memory (p. 210).

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Set CM SEARCH in to ON in the menu settings (p. 154). The default setting is ON. (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the date search indicator appears.

The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH → TITLE SEARCH → DATE SEARCH → PHOTO SEARCH → PHOTO SCAN → no indicator

(4) Press or on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the beginning of the selected date.

Searching a recording by date - Date search

To stop searching

Press ■.

Note

If one day's recording is less than two minutes, your camcorder may not accurately find the point where the recording date changes.

  • The bar in the 00 mark indicates the present point on the tape.
  • The x mark in the 00 indicates the actual point you are trying to search.

If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions

The date search function may not work correctly.

Searching for the date without using cassette memory

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Set CM SEARCH in to OFF in the menu settings (p. 154). If using a tape without cassette memory, skip this step. (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the date search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH → DATE SEARCH → PHOTO SEARCH → PHOTO SCAN → no indicator (4) Press on the Remote Commander to search for the previous date or press on the Remote Commander to search for the next date. Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the point where the date changes. Each time you press or, your camcorder searches for the previous or next date.

To stop searching

Press ■.

Searching for a photo - Photo search/Photo scan

You can search for a still picture you have recorded on a mini DV tape (photo search). You can also search for still pictures one after another and display each picture for five seconds automatically regardless of cassette memory (photo scan). Use the Remote Commander for these operations. Use this function to check or edit still pictures.

Searching for a photo using cassette memory

You can use this function only when playing back a tape with cassette memory (p. 210).

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Set CM SEARCH in to ON in the menu settings (p. 154). Default setting is ON. (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the photo search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH → TITLE SEARCH → DATE SEARCH → PHOTO SEARCH → PHOTO SCAN → no indicator (4) Press or on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo having the date that you selected.

You can search for a still picture you have recorded on a mini DV tape (photo search).

You can select still images and display each of them for about 5 seconds, regardless of the cassette type (Photo scan). For these operations, use the Remote Commander. Use this function to check the installation of still images.

Photo search using cassette memory

This function can be used only during playback of a tape with cassette memory (p. 210). (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Set CM SEARCH in the menu settings to ON (p. 154). The default setting is ON. (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the photo search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH → TITLE SEARCH → DATE SEARCH → PHOTO SEARCH → PHOTO SCAN → no indicator (4) Press . or ► on the Remote Commander to select a date for playback. The camcorder automatically starts playback of photos from the selected date.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Photo search using cassette memory - 1

Searching for a photo - Photo search/Photo scan

To stop searching

Press ■.

In the 00 mark

  • The bar in the 00 mark indicates the present point on the tape.
  • The × mark in the 00 indicates the actual point you are trying to search for.

If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions

The photo search function may not work correctly.

Searching for a photo without using cassette memory

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Set CM SEARCH in the menu settings to OFF (p. 154). (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the photo search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH → DATE SEARCH → PHOTO SEARCH → PHOTO SCAN → no indicator (4) Press . or ► on the Remote Commander to select a photo for playback. Each time you press . or ► your camcorder searches for the previous or next photo. Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo.

To stop searching

Press ■.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the photo scan indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH → TITLE SEARCH → DATE SEARCH → PHOTO SEARCH → PHOTO SCAN → no indicator (3) Press ◄ or ► on the Remote Commander. Each photo is played back for about five seconds automatically.

Photo Scan

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Press the SEARCH MODE button on the remote control until the search indicator for photo scanning appears. The indicator changes in the following order: INDEX SEARCH → TITLE SEARCH → DATE SEARCH → PHOTO SEARCH → PHOTO SCAN → no indicator. (3) Press the ▷ button on the remote control. Each photo will be automatically displayed for approximately five seconds.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Photo Scan - 1

To stop scanning Press ■.

To stop scanning, press the ■ button.

Playing back a tape with picture effects

During playback, you can process a scene using the picture effect functions: NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W and SOLARIZE.

In playback or playback pause mode, press PICTURE EFFECT and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial until the desired picture effect indicator (NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W or SOLARIZE) appears.

For details of each picture effect function, see page 56.

Belt tensioning with image effects

The image can be changed using the image effects function: NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W and SOLARIZE.

In playback or playback pause mode, press PICTURE EFFECT and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial until the desired picture effect indicator (NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W or SOLARIZE) appears.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Belt tensioning with image effects - 1

To cancel the picture effect function

Press PICTURE EFFECT so that the indicator disappears.

Notes

  • You cannot process a picture using the picture effect function that is input from other equipment.
  • To record pictures that you have processed using the picture effect function, record the pictures on the VCR, using your camcorder as a player.

Pictures processed by the picture effect function

Pictures processed by the picture effect function are not output through the DV IN/OUT jack.

When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back

The picture effect function will be automatically cancelled.

To cancel the picture effect function

Press PICTURE EFFECT so that the indicator disappears.

Notes

  • Pictures input from other equipment cannot be changed using the picture effect function. To record pictures that have been modified using the picture effect function, record the pictures on the VCR, using your camcorder as a player.

Pictures modified using the picture effect function

Images inserted using image sockets are not transmitted through the DV IN/OUT connector.

Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) or stop playback.

Playing back a tape with digital effects

During playback, you can process a scene using the digital effect functions: STILL, FLASH, LUMI, and TRAIL.

(1) In playback or playback pause mode, press DIGITAL EFFECT and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial until the desired digital effect indicator (STILL, FLASH, LUMI, or TRAIL) flashes. (2) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The digital effect indicator lights up and the bars appear. In STILL or LUMI mode, the picture is captured and is stored in memory as a still picture at the time you press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect. For details of each digital effect function, see page 58.

Playing back a tape with digital effects

The image can be changed using the special effects functions: STILL, FLASH, LUMI, and TRAIL.

(1) In playback mode or playback pause mode, press the DIGITAL EFFECT button and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial until the indicator of the desired digital effect (STILL, FLASH, LUMI, or TRAIL) starts flashing. (2) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The indicator of the selected effect lights up and a bar appears. While the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial is pressed, the image is captured and stored in memory as a still image. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect. For details on each digital effect function, see page 58.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Playing back a tape with digital effects - 1

To cancel the digital effect function

Press DIGITAL EFFECT so that the indicator disappears.

To cancel the digital effect function

Press DIGITAL EFFECT so that the indicator disappears.

Playing back a tape with digital effects

Notes

  • You cannot process a picture using the digital effect function that is input from other equipment.
  • To record pictures that you have processed using the digital effect function, record the pictures on the VCR, using your camcorder as a player.

Pictures processed by the digital effect function

Pictures processed by the digital effect function are not output through the DV IN/OUT jack.

When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back

The digital effect function will be automatically cancelled.

Playing back a tape with digital effects

Notes

Images imported from other equipment cannot be modified using the digital effect function. To record images that have been modified using the digital effect function, record them on a videotape using the camcorder as a player.

Images that have been modified using the digital effect function are not output through the DV IN/OUT jack.

Install the POWER switch in the OFF (CHG) position or stop playback.

The digital effect function

is automatically cancelled.

Dubbing a tape

Using the A/V connecting cable

Connect your camcorder to the VCR using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder.

Before dubbing

Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings.

(Default setting is LCD.)

Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE, if available.

(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert the recorded tape into your camcorder. (2) Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the VCR. (3) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder. (5) Start recording on the VCR. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the VCR.

Tape dubbing

Using the audio/video cable

Connect the camcorder to the VCR using the supplied audio/video cable.

Before dubbing

Set the DISPLAY parameter to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)

Set the input signal selectors on the video monitor to the LINE position, if available.

(1) Insert a blank tape (a tape on which recording is to be made) into the video cassette recorder. (2) Set the input selector of the video cassette recorder to the LINE position. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the video cassette recorder. (3) Set the POWER switch to the VCR position. (4) Start playback of the recorded tape on the video camera. (5) Start recording on the video cassette recorder. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the video cassette recorder.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before dubbing - 1

When you have finished dubbing the tape

Press on both your camcorder and the VCR.

When you have finished dubbing the tape

HaxmTe KhONky Ha BnDeokampe n Ha BnDeomarHnToΦOHe.

Be sure to clear the indicators from the screen

If they are displayed, press the following buttons so as not to record the indicators on the dubbed tape:

  • The DISPLAY button
  • The DATA CODE button
  • The SEARCH MODE button on the Remote Commander

You can edit on VCRs that support the following systems

8 mm, Hi8, Digital8, VHS, S-VHS, VHSC, S-VHSC, Betamax, ED Beta, Mini DV or DV

If your VCR is a monaural type

Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video input jack and the white plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. The red plugs are not used.

Connect using an S video cable (not supplied) to obtain high-quality pictures. With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect the S video cable (not supplied) to the S video jacks on both your camcorder and the TV or the VCR. This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.

If you use a LANC cable

You can edit precisely by connecting a LANC cable (not supplied) to this camcorder and other video equipment having a fine synchro-editing function, using this camcorder as a player.

Using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)

Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied) to DV IN/OUT and to DV IN/OUT of the DV products. With a digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing. You cannot dub the titles, display indicators or the contents of cassette memory.

  • Khonka DISPLAY
  • Khonka DATA CODE KhoKa SEARCH MODE Ha npIbTe nCTaHOnOHoro ynpaBHeHH

MOHTAX MOXKHO BbINOJHrTb Ha BVNeOMaHrHToΦoHaX, KOTOpble NOdEpxkBaIOT CJIeDyUOuNE CnCTembl

8 MM, Hi8 Hi8, Digital8, VHS VHS S-VHS, VHSC VHSC, VHSC S-VHSC, Betamax, ED Beta ED Betamax, Min DY MHH DV mnn DV

EcnBnIeOMarHHTofoh MOHOOHueCKO Tnna

ПодсоeДиНITEжENTbIшТeКep COeДиНTeЛьнОгАКаБЕЯayДиO/BuДeоK BxOДнOMугHe3dvyBnDEOCINHana,a6БeIbI shTeKep- K BXoDHomуrgHe3dvyayDNOCINHana Na BxIDeOMaRHTHOTOpHNeNTEJEBN3Ope. KpaChbIeшТeKepbl He mCNoJIb3yIOTcR.

CoeHHeHne c NOMOsbIO BnDeoKa6eJIaS (He BXoIbT B KOMnJIeKT) dJIa NOLyUeHnB bICOKoKaueCTBeHHbIX N3o6paXKeHn

ПиТаКOM COeINHeHIn He HUxHo NoДКЛIOuATb XeJIbI (BnDEo) WTeKepe COeINHITIELBOKABeJIa aydIO/BnDEo. ПОдСоeINHITe BnDEOkaBeJIb S (He BXoINT B KOMIINEKT) K BnDEOrHe3dAm S Ha BnDEOkaMEpe n TeLeBn3OpE INN BnDEOMaHHToPoHE. 3To COeINHEne No3BOJAErT NOyUHTb BbICOKOKaYeCTBeHHoe n3O6paXeHne fopMaTa DV.

Ecnn nncnoj3yetcKa6eJb LANC

CoeHHeHne 3ToB BnDeOkaMepbI c DpyroB BnDeoannapaTpyo, IMeIoUeI cyHKUIO TOOH O CINXPOHn3aUIN dJI MONTaJxA, C NOMOuBIO Ka6eLANC (He BXoDITB KOMNKeT) I NOCJeIyUoUee IcNOJIb3OBAHne BnDEOkApeBb I KaueCTBe NIIeepa IOnB0JIaET BbINOHNb OYeHb TOnHbIMOHTax.

IcnoJIb3OBAHne Ka6eIaLINK (coeHNHTeNbHi Ka6eIb DV)

IpocTo noCoeDInHTe Ka6bI.lLINK (coeDInHTeBbIyKa6bI DV) (He BXoNT B KOMnJIeKt) K rHe3dy BV IN/OUT n rHe3dy DV IN/OUT annapatob DV. Pnp IcNoIb3OBAHmN CuPPOBOrO CoeDInHeHnBnDeo- N ayDIOcRHaJbI nepeDaIOTCBuCpPBOBOM BnDe, yTO oEcbceNBAeT BbICOKoe KaueCTBo MOThaJa.TITpbI, INDkATOpbl HaIcnCpEe nn CoepKahne KaccetHOJ nAMrtnpepeAINCbBaT Heh3n.

(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert the recorded tape into your camcorder. (2) Set the input selector on the VCR to the DV input position if the VCR is equipped with an input selector. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the VCR. (3) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder. (5) Start recording on the VCR.

Signal flow/IpoxokdeneHne cnHnanaSONY DCR-VX2000E - When you have finished dubbing the tape - 1

Ipepe3anncb IeHTbl

(1) Insert the unrecorded tape (the tape on which you want to record) into the camcorder, and insert the recorded tape into the VCR. (2) Set the input selector on the VCR (if it has one) to the DV position. For details, see the operating instructions of the VCR. (3) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (4) Start playing back the recorded tape on the VCR. (5) Start recording on the camcorder.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Ipepe3anncb IeHTbl - 1

When you have finished dubbing a tape

Press on both your camcorder and the VCR.

You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)

Pictures processed by the digital effect or picture effect function

Pictures processed by the digital effect or picture effect function are not output through the DV IN/OUT jack.

If you record a playback pause picture with the DV IN/OUT jack

The recorded picture becomes rough. And when you play back the picture using other video equipment, the picture may jitter.

When you have finished dubbing a tape

Do not use the camera near a video camera or video monitor.

You can connect only one video intercom to the cable.LINK (connecting cable DV).

Images modified using image processing functions or image processing functions

Images created using image effects or image effect functions are not transmitted through the DV IN/OUT input/output jack.

Power supply connector for the nest DV IN/OUT

The image will be blurry. When reproducing the image on other video equipment, it may flicker.

Dubbing only desired scenes - Digital program editing

You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto a tape without operating the VCR. Scenes can be selected by frame.

Only for lower zones - syphons in video tapes according to the program

You can also select episodes (programs) for installation without controlling the video recorder. Episodes can be selected by frames.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Only for lower zones - syphons in video tapes according to the program - 1

[a] Undesired frame

[b] Moves the scene

Before operating the digital program editing

Preparation 1: Connecting the VCR (p. 105, 107).

Preparation 2: Setting the VCR to operate by infrared rays emitter (p. 110)/Setting the VCR to operate with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (p. 116).

Preparation 3: Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR (p. 117).

When you dub using the same VCR again, you can skip Preparations 2 and 3.

Using the digital program editing function

Operation 1: Making programs (p. 121).

Operation 2: Performing a digital program editing (Dubbing a tape) (p. 124).

[a] Unwanted frame

Changing the setup

Procedure for digital program editing

Step 1: Connecting the VCR (pages 105, 107).

Step 2: Setting the VCR to operate from the infrared remote (page 110) / Setting the VCR to operate with the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (page 116).

Step 3: Synchronizing the VCR (page 117).

If you use the same VCR again, you can skip steps 2 and 3.

Using digital program editing

Step 1: Creating a program (page 121).

Step 2: Performing digital program editing (recording cassette) (page 124).

Dubbing only desired scenes - Digital program editing

Use only these types of video chips in video cards according to the program.

Notes

  • You cannot dub the titles, display indicators, or the contents of cassette memory.
  • When you connect with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), you may not be able to operate the dubbing function correctly, depending on the VCR.

Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings of your camcorder. - You cannot send the control signal of the digital program editing through the LANC jack.

If you connect using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)

With digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing.

Preparation 1: Connecting the VCR

Connect your camcorder and the VCR as shown on pages 105 and 107.

You can use an A/V connecting cable, or an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable).

The indicators and the cassette memory contents are not copied. When connecting with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), the playback function may not work properly depending on the video software.

In the camcorder menu settings, set CONTROL to IR.

  • Control signal transmission during tape editing and in the program is not possible via the LANC jack.

Connection is made using a LINK cable (connecting cable DV).

Video and audio connections are transmitted with video, which ensures high installation quality.

Preparation 2: Setting the VCR to operate by infrared rays emitter

To edit using the VCR, send the control signal by infrared ray to the remote sensor on the VCR. When you connect using the A/V cable, this procedure is required.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder. (2) Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to LINE. When you connect a video camera recorder, set its POWER switch to VCR. (3) Press MENU to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ETC, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial. (7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR, then press the dial.

Set the IR SETUP code

(8) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR SETUP, then press the dial. (9) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the IR SETUP code of your VCR, then press the dial. See "About the IR SETUP code" on page 112.

Procedure 2: Setting up the VCR control using the infrared emitter.

About the IR SETUP code

The IR SETUP code is stored in the memory of your camcorder. Be sure to set the correct code, depending on your VCR. Code number 1 is the default setting.

BrandRemote control code
Sony1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Aiwa53
Akai62, 50, 74
Alba73
Baird36, 30
Blaupunkt83, 78
Bush74
Canon97
CGM47, 83, 36
Clatronic73
Daewoo26
Ferguson76
Fisher73
Funai80
Goldstar47
Goodmans26, 84
Grundig83, 09
Hitachi42, 56
ITT/Nikia Instant36
JVC12, 21, 15, 11
Kendo47
Loewe16, 47, 84
Luxor89
Mark26*
Matsui47, 60, 58*
Mitsubishi28, 29
Nokia89, 36
Nokia Oceanic89
Nordmende76, 100

Information about the IR SETUP code

The IR SETUP code is stored in the memory of the camcorder. Set the correct code according to the VCR you are using. By default, code number 1 is set.

Фирма-нз�овпельКод пьытадистанцюногуnpавлика
Sony1,2,3,4,5,6
Aiwa53
Akai62,50,74
Alba73
Baird36,30
Blaupunkt83,78
Bush74
Canon97
CGM47,83,36
Clatronic73
Daewoo26
Ferguson76
Fisher73
Funai80
Goldstar47
Goodmans26,84
Grundig83,09
Hitachi42,56
ITT/NokiaInstant36
JVC12,21,15,11
Kendo47
Loewe16,47,84
Luxor89
Mark26*
Matsui47,60,58*
Mitsubishi28,29
Nokia89,36
Nokia Oceanic89
Nordmende76,100

Dubbing only desired scenes - Digital program editing

BrandRemote control code
Okano60, 62, 63
Orion70, 58*
Panasonic16, 78, 96
Philips83, 84, 86
Phonola83, 84
Roadstar47
SABA76, 21
Samsung93, 94, 52, 22
Sanyo36
Schneider84, 10
SEG73
Seleco47, 74
Sharp89
Siemens10, 36
Tandberg26
Telefunken91, 92
Thomson76
Thorn36, 47
Toshiba40
Universum92, 70, 47
W. W. House47
Watson83, 58
  • TV/VCR component

Note on remote control code

You cannot do assemble editing with some VCRs (for recording) if the remote control code does not correspond to this camcorder (for playback).

Use only lower-case letters in video titles according to the program.

Фиrimа-изrogenobintelbКод пьытадистанцунноунеленя
Okano60, 62, 63
Orion70, 58*
Panasonic16, 78, 96
Philips83, 84, 86
Phonola83, 84
Roadstar47
SABA76, 21
Samsung93, 94, 52, 22
Sanyo36
Schneider84, 10
SEG73
Seleco47, 74
Sharp89
Siemens10, 36
Tandberg26
Telefunken91, 92
Thomson76
Thorn36, 47
Toshiba40
Universum92, 70, 47
W. W. House47
Watson83, 58
  • TV/VCR component

Regarding the test of the remote control system

With some VCRs, you cannot perform editing (for recording) if the remote control code does not match this camcorder (for playback).

Setting the buttons to cancel the recording pause on the VCR

(1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PAUSEMODE, then press the dial. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the button to cancel recording pause on the VCR, then press the dial.

The correct button depends on your VCR. Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.

Button to cancel pause during recording on the video tape recorder.

(1) Turn the DMCK SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PAUSE MODE, then press the dial. (2) Turn the DMCK SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the pause time for video recording, then press the dial.

The selection of the correct button depends on the video tape recorder.

Refer to the operating instructions of the video tape recorder.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Button to cancel pause during recording on the video tape recorder. - 1

1,2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 1,2 - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 1,2 - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 1,2 - 3

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 1,2 - 4

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 1,2 - 5

OTHERS

EDIT SET

CONTROL

ADJ TEST

CUT-IN

CUT-OUT

IR SETUP

ETC

The buttons to cancel recording pause on the VCR

The buttons vary depending on your VCR. To cancel recording pause:

  • Select PAUSE if the button to cancel recording pause is I.
  • Select REC if the button to cancel recording pause is ●.
  • Select PB if the button to cancel recording pause is ▶.

Recording pause button on the video tape recorder

Depending on the model and video tape, to cancel pause during recording:

  • Select PAUSE if the button to cancel recording pause is II.
  • Select REC if the button to cancel recording pause is ●.
  • Select PB if the button to cancel recording pause is ▶.

Setting your camcorder and the VCR to face each other

Locate the infrared ray emitter of your camcorder and face it towards the remote sensor of the VCR.

Set the devices about 30 cm (about 11 7/8 in) apart, and remove any obstacles between the devices.

Install the video camera and VCR facing each other.

To avoid interference, point the video camera's remote sensor at the VCR's remote sensor.

Place the devices approximately 30 cm apart and remove any obstacles between them.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Install the video camera and VCR facing each other. - 1

Confirming the VCR operation

(1) Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set it to recording pause. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR TEST, then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.

If the VCR starts recording, the setting is correct.

When finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.

The adjustment is correct, which means proper tuning.

OTHERS EDIT SET CONTROL CONTRAST ADJ TEST ADT "CUT-OUT OUT OUT LB. SETUP 1. PAUSEMODE PAUSEMOD IUP TEST IR TEST

RETURN

Dubbing only desired scenes - Digital program editing

When the VCR does not operate correctly

Set the IR SETUP code, or select the button to cancel the recording pause on the VCR.

When you connect using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied), follow the procedures below.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder. (2) Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to DV input. When you connect a video camera recorder, set its POWER switch to VCR. (3) Press MENU to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ETC, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial. (7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select i.LINK, then press the dial.

If the video tape recorder does not operate correctly

Set the IR SETUP, and select the button to cancel pause during recording on the video tape recorder.

Connect using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied). Perform the procedures described below.

(1) Set the POWER switch on the video camera to VCR. (2) Turn on the power to the connected VCR, then set the input selector to the input signal D V. For the connected video camera, set its POWER switch to VCR. (3) Press the MENU button to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ETC, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial. (7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select i.LINK, then press the dial.

1SONY DCR-VX2000E - Preparation 2: Setting up the VCR for operation with the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Preparation 2: Setting up the VCR for operation with the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) - 2

3SONY DCR-VX2000E - Preparation 2: Setting up the VCR for operation with the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) - 3

4,5SONY DCR-VX2000E - Preparation 2: Setting up the VCR for operation with the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) - 4

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Preparation 2: Setting up the VCR for operation with the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) - 5

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Preparation 2: Setting up the VCR for operation with the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) - 6

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Preparation 2: Setting up the VCR for operation with the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) - 7

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Preparation 2: Setting up the VCR for operation with the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) - 8

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Preparation 2: Setting up the VCR for operation with the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) - 9

6,7 CSONY DCR-VX2000E - Preparation 2: Setting up the VCR for operation with the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) - 10

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Preparation 2: Setting up the VCR for operation with the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) - 11

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Preparation 2: Setting up the VCR for operation with the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) - 12

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Preparation 2: Setting up the VCR for operation with the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) - 13

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Preparation 2: Setting up the VCR for operation with the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) - 14

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Preparation 2: Setting up the VCR for operation with the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) - 15

Preparation 3: Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR

You can adjust the synchronization of your camcorder and the VCR.

Remove the cassette from the camcorder

beforehand. We recommend that you prepare a pen and paper for notes.

When you connect to a Sony VCR using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), and have

set CONTROL to i.LINK, the setup below is not necessary.

Preparation 3: Setup

Synchronization

Video monitor

You can set up synchronization

of the video camera and video monitor.

First, remove the cassette from

the video camera. It is recommended to prepare

a pen and paper for notes.

If you have connected a Sony video monitor with

an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), and

set CONTROL

Set the CONTROL switch to i.LINK.

The setup procedure described below does not need to be performed.

Perform the following steps:

(1) Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set it to recording pause. When you connect using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) and have set CONTROL to i.LINK, you do not have to turn the recording VCR to recording pause mode. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (3) Press MENU to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ETC, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ADJ TEST, then press the dial. (7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. CUT-IN and CUT-OUT are recorded on an image for five times each to calculate the numerical values for adjusting the synchronization.

The EXECUTING indicator flashes on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. When finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.

(1) Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set it to recording pause. If the connection is made using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) and the CONTROL command is set to i.LINK, the recording VCR does not need to be switched to recording pause mode. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (3) Press the MENU button to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ETC, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ADJ TEST, then press the dial. (7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. The images are recorded with five markers each for CUT-IN and CUT-OUT, allowing the numerical values for synchronization adjustment to be calculated. On the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, the EXECUTING indicator flashes. When finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Video monitor - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Video monitor - 2

(8) Rewind the tape in the VCR, then start slow playback. Take a note of the opening numerical value of each CUT-IN and the closing numerical value of each CUT-OUT. (9) Calculate the average of all the opening numerical values of each CUT-IN, and the average of all the closing numerical values of each CUT-OUT. (10) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select "CUT-IN," then press the dial. (11) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the average numerical value of CUT-IN, then press the dial. The calculated start position for recording is set. (12) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select "CUT-OUT," then press the dial. (13) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the average numerical value of CUT-OUT, then press the dial. The calculated stop position for recording is set. (14) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select "RETURN," then press the dial.

Recording only the lower episodes of digital video tapes according to the program.

(8) Rewind the cassette in the video recorder to the beginning, then enable slow playback. Note the initial numeric value of each CUT-IN mark and the final numeric value of each CUT-OUT mark. (9) Calculate the average of all initial numeric values for each CUT-IN mark, as well as the average of all final numeric values for each CUT-OUT mark. (10) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select "CUT-IN", then press the dial. (11) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the average numeric value for CUT-IN, then press the dial. The calculated initial position for recording is set. (12) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select "CUT-OUT", then press the dial. (13) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the average numeric value for CUT-OUT, then press the dial. The calculated final position for recording is set. (14) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select "RETURN", then press the dial.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Recording only the lower episodes of digital video tapes according to the program. - 1

10,11

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 10,11 - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 10,11 - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 10,11 - 3

OTHERS

W EDIT SET

CONTROLS

ADJ TEST

"CUT-IN"

CUT-OUT

IR SETUP

ETC PAUSEMODE

IR TEST

RETURN

OTHERS

EDIT

CONT

ADJ TEST

CUT-IN

CUT-OUT

IR SETUP

PAUSE MODE

R

RETURN

12,13

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 12,13 - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 12,13 - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 12,13 - 3

OTHERS

EDIT SET

CONTROL

ADJ TEST

CUT-IN

CUT-OUT

IR SETUP

ETC PAUSEMODE

IR TEST

DRAFT

OTHERS

W EDIT SET

CONTROL

ADJ TEST

“CUT-IN”

“CUT-OUT”

IR SETUP

ETC PAUSEMODE

E IR

RETURN

Errors in editing

If you connect your camcorder to Sony equipment with the DV jack, the range of errors is within ±5 frames.

The range may become wider in the following conditions:

  • The interval between CUT-IN and CUT-OUT is less than five seconds (p. 121).
  • CUT-IN or CUT-OUT is set at the beginning of the tape.

When "ENGAGE REC PAUSE" appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder

Turn the recording VCR to recording pause mode.

If the VCR does not operate correctly

Make sure the IR SETUP code is correct; reset if necessary.

When the operations of the VCR do not work with an i.LINK cable

Keep the i.LINK connection, and carry out Preparation 2 (p. 116) again. The audio and video signals are sent as digital signals.

Editing

Operation 1: Making Programs

(1) Insert the tape for playback into your camcorder, and insert a tape for recording into the VCR. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ETC, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT, then press the dial. (5) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video control buttons, then pause playback (p. 42).

Operation 1: Making Programs

(1) Insert the cassette with the recording into the video camera, and the cassette for recording into the video recorder. (2) Press the MENU button to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the ETG setting, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT, then press the dial. (5) Find the first scene to be inserted using the video control buttons, then activate the playback pause mode (p.42).

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Operation 1: Making Programs - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Operation 1: Making Programs - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Operation 1: Making Programs - 3

(6) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, or MARK on the Remote Commander. The CUT-IN point of the first program is set, and the top part of the program mark changes to light blue. (7) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video operating buttons, then pause playback (p. 42). (8) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, or MARK on the Remote Commander. The CUT-OUT point of the first program is set, then the bottom part of the program mark changes to light blue. (9) Repeat steps 5 to 8, then set the program. When the program is set, the program mark changes to light blue.

You can set a maximum of 20 programs.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Operation 1: Making Programs - 4

On a blank portion of the tape

You cannot set CUT-IN or CUT-OUT on a blank portion of the tape.

Note

The total time of the programs is indicated on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, however, if the time code on the tape is not continuous, the time may not be indicated properly.

Recording only the lower part of the digital video editing by program

(6) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial or the MARK button on the Remote Commander.

The start point CUT-IN of the first programmed scene is set, and the color of the upper program mark indicator changes to light blue.

(7) Find the end of the first scene to be inserted using the video control buttons, then set the playback pause mode (p.42). (8) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial or the MARK button on the Remote Commander.

The end point CUT-OUT of the first programmed scene is set, and the color of the lower program mark indicator changes to light blue.

(9) Repeat steps 5 to 8, then finish programming. After programming is completed, the color of the program mark indicator changes to light blue.

You can set a maximum of 20 programs.

6SONY DCR-VX2000E - Recording only the lower part of the digital video editing by program - 1

VIDEOEDIT 0:08:55:06 MARK 1 OUT

UNDO

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Recording only the lower part of the digital video editing by program - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Recording only the lower part of the digital video editing by program - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Recording only the lower part of the digital video editing by program - 3

TOTAL 0:00:47:12 DATE Date

On an unrecorded section of the tape

CUT-IN and CUT-OUT cannot be set on an unrecorded section of the tape.

Note

The total program time is indicated on the screen or in the display, but if the time code on the tape is not continuous, the time may be displayed incorrectly.

Dubbing only desired scenes - Digital program editing

Erasing the last program

To change the end of the last program, delete the CUT-OUT mark.

To erase the whole program, delete both the CUT-IN and CUT-OUT marks.

(1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select UNDO, then press the dial. The last set program mark flashes. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial and the setting is cancelled.

To cancel erasing

Select RETURN in step 2, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

Erasing all programs

(1) Select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL, then press the dial. All the program marks flash. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial and the settings are cancelled.

To cancel erasing all programs

Select RETURN in step 2, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

To cancel a program you have set Press MENU.

The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected.

Erasing only the lower case letters - Digital video editing by program

Deleting the last programmed episode from the program

To set a different end point for the last programmed episode, delete the CUT-OUT mark.

To delete the entire programmed episode from the program, delete both the CUT-IN and CUT-OUT marks.

(1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select UNDO, then press the dial. The mark of the last program flashes. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial, and the setting is cancelled.

To cancel the deletion

Select RETURN in step 2, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

Erasing all programs

(1) Select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL, then press the dial. All program marks are erased. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. The settings are canceled.

Operation 2: Performing a digital program editing (Dubbing a tape)

Make sure your camcorder and VCR are connected, and that the VCR is set to recording pause. When you use an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), you do not have to set the VCR to recording pause. When you use a video camera recorder, set its POWER switch to VCR.

(1) Select VIDEO EDIT. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select START, then press the dial. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. The camcorder automatically searches for the beginning of the first program, then starts dubbing. The EXECUTING indicator flashes. The SEARCH indicator appears during search, and the EDIT indicator appears during edit on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. The program marks light up after dubbing is complete. When the dubbing ends, your camcorder and the VCR automatically stop.

To stop dubbing

Press on this camcorder or on the Remote Commander.

To end the digital program editing function Your camcorder stops when the dubbing is complete. Then the display returns to VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings. Press MENU to end the digital program editing function.

Action 2: Performing digital assembly of the program (tape re-recording)

Make sure the camcorder is connected to the VCR, and the VCR is set to recording pause. If you use an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), the VCR does not need to be set to recording pause. When recording on a video camera recorder, set its POWER switch to VCR.

The remote control device is used to control the device.

To cancel the digital program editing function

After completing the re-recording, the VIDEO EDIT command will appear again in the menu settings. Press the MENU button to exit the editing function of the program.

Dubbing only desired scenes - Digital program editing

When the operations of the VCR do not work with an i.LINK cable Keep the i.LINK connection, and carry out Preparation 2 (p. 116) again.

You cannot record on the VCR when:

  • The cassette is not inserted.
  • The tape has run out.
  • The write-protect tab is set to the protect position.
  • The IR SETUP code is not correct. (When IR is selected.)
  • The setup to cancel recording pause is not correct (p. 114). (When IR is selected.)

NOT READY appears on the LCD screen when:

  • The program to operate the digital program edit has not been made.
  • i.LINK is selected but an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) is not connected. (When i.LINK is selected.)
  • The power of the connected VCR is not turned on.

Recording is possible only on the lower half of the screen for digital program edit.

If the VCR cannot be controlled with the i.LINK cable

Without disconnecting the i.LINK cable, perform Setup 2 (p. 116) once again.

Recording will not be possible if:

  • The cassette is not inserted. The tape has run out. The write-protect tab is set to the protect position.
  • Incorrect IR setup. (When IR is selected.)
  • Incorrect date or time for date/time recording (p. 114). (When IR is selected.)

The message "NOT READY" appears on the screen when:

  • The program for controlling the tape playback is not set up.
  • i.LINK is selected, but the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) is not connected. (When i.LINK is selected.) The connected video unit is not turned on.

Using with an analog video unit and a PC - Signal convert function

You can convert the analog input signal to the digital signal and output it from the DV IN/OUT jack on this camcorder. You can capture images and sound from an analog video unit connecting a PC which has the i.LINK (DV) jack to your camcorder.

Use with similar video equipment IPK - Signal conversion function

You can convert the analog input signal to a digital signal and output it from the DV IN/OUT jack of this camcorder. By connecting a PC with an i.LINK (DV) connector to the camcorder, you can capture individual frames and sound from an analog video unit.

Signal flowSONY DCR-VX2000E - Use with similar video equipment IPK - Signal conversion function - 1

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select V, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select A/V → DV OUT, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (6) Press MENU to erase the menu display. (7) Start playback on the analog video unit slightly ahead of the point from which you want to start capturing images. (8) Start capturing procedures on your PC. The operation procedures depend on your PC and the software which you use. For details on how to capture images, refer to the instruction manual of your PC and your software.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Press the MENU button to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the [W] setting, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select A/V → DV OUT, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the ON setting, then press the dial. (6) Press the MENU button to remove the menu display. (7) Turn on the analog video device a little before the point from which you want to start recording frames. (8) Start recording frames on the PI. The procedure for this depends on the PI and the software used. For more detailed information on frame recording, refer to the PI's operating instructions and the software documentation.

Using with an analog video unit and a PC - Signal convert function

After capturing images and sound, stop capturing procedures on your PC, and stop the playback on the analog video unit.

Notes

  • When you edit the captured image and sound from the analog video unit by a PC, you need to install an appropriate software which can exchange video signals between the camcorder and a PC.
  • Depending on the condition of the analog video signals, the PC may not be able to output the images correctly when you convert analog video signals into digital video signals via your camcorder. Depending on the analog video unit, the image may contain noise or incorrect colours.
  • The camcorder cannot output the digital signal when you input the analog signal that includes a copyright protection signal.

Using the camcorder with analog video equipment and a PC - Conversion function

After recording images and sound

Stop the recording process on the PC and stop playback on the analog video equipment.

Note

  • When editing the captured images and sound from an analog video device with a PC, you need to install appropriate software that can transfer video signals between the camcorder and the PC. Depending on the quality of the analog video signal, the PC may not display the images correctly after the camcorder converts the analog video signals to digital. Depending on the analog video device, the image may be blurry or have incorrect color reproduction. The camcorder cannot output a digital signal if the input analog signal contains a signal for copyright protection.

Recording video or TV programs

Recording video or TV programs

Using the A/V connecting cable

You can record a tape from another VCR or a TV program from a TV that has video/audio outputs. Use your camcorder as a recorder.

(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into your camcorder. If you want to record a tape from the VCR, insert a recorded tape into the VCR. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder. (3) Set DISPLAY in ETC to LCD in the menu settings (p. 154). (4) Press MENU to erase the menu display. (5) Press REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder, then immediately press STOP on your camcorder. (6) Press PLAY on the VCR to start playback if you record a tape from a VCR. Select a TV program if you record from a TV. The picture from a TV or VCR appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (7) Press REC on your camcorder at the scene from which you want to start recording.

Use of the connecting cable for audio/video

You can record from another video recorder or record a TV program from a TV that has video/audio outputs. Use a video camera as the recording device.

Insert the cassette (or the cassette with the recording you want to make) into the camcorder. If you need to make a recording from a video tape, insert the recorded tape into the VCR. (2) Set the POWER switch on the camcorder to VCR. (3) Set the DISPLAY command in the menu settings to LCD (p. 154). (4) Press the MENU button to erase the menu. (5) Simultaneously press the REC button and the button to its right on the camcorder, then immediately press the button on the camcorder. (6) Press the button on the VCR to start playback, if the recording is being made from the VCR. Select the TV program if the recording is being made from the TV. The image from the TV or VCR will appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (7) Press the button on the camcorder at the point where you want to start recording.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Use of the connecting cable for audio/video - 1

When you have finished recording

Press on both your camcorder and the VCR.

Using the Remote Commander

In step 5, press REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press. And in step 7, press at the scene from which you want to start recording.

If your VCR is a monaural type

Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video output jack and the white plug to the audio output jack on the VCR or the TV. The red plugs are not used.

Connect using an S video cable (not supplied) to obtain high-quality pictures. With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable.

Connect an S video cable (not supplied) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the VCR.

This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.

If you do various playbacks on the VCR during recording

The recorded picture may be blurred.

On the commander mode

Your camcorder works in the commander mode, VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3 are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid remote control misoperation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2, we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with black paper.

On index signal

The index is automatically marked on a tape when you start recording. If you mark the index using the INDEX MARK button during recording, "LINE" appears in the CH column on the INDEX SEARCH screen, and the index is recorded on cassette memory.

3a nscb Bndeo nIe TeJe nporpamM

Pocne 3aBepweHn3aHncn

HaxMMTe KhoNky Ha BnDeOkampe n Ha BnDeOMarHHTOfoHe.

IcnoJb3OBAHne npJbTa ductaHUnOHnOro ynpabJeHn

B NyHKe 5 OJHObpeMeHHo HaxMnTe KhoNky REc n KhoNky MARK,3aTEM cpa3y HaxMnTe KhoNky I.B nyHKe 7 HaxMnTe KhoNky B Tom MecTe, C KOtOporo HyXHo Haayatb 3aIncb.

EcIn BndeomarHnToΦOH MOHOHnueckoro Tnna

IoiKJIOUHTe JeNTbIy IwTekep COeINHITBeHOrO KaBEna ayDnO/BuJeO K BbIXOHoMy rHe3dY BuNDeOCrHnA, a 6bEnbI yIwTekeP K BixoHOMy rHe3dY ayDnOCrHnA hBa NlEoMaHrHtOcFOHe nLi TeBEN3ope. KpacHbIe wTekepb He nCnONb3yOTcR.

CoéiHHeHne C nOMOusIO BVNeOka6eJIaS (He BXoIbT B KOMnJIeKT) dJIr NOLyUeHnB BBICOKOKaueCTBeHHbIX N3O6paJxehn

Ipi TaKOM CoeINHeHn He HUxHo NoDKIIOuATb XeNTbI (BvDeo) WTeKepe CoEINHTeNbHO Ka6eNa ayDmo/BVdeo. PiOnCoeINHtBe BVdeOka6eJIb S (He BXoNt B KOMPJIeKT) K BVDeOrHe3dAm S Ha BVdeOKaMepe N BVdeOMaHnTOfoHe. 3To CoeINHeHne No3BOJNeT NOJyUHTb BbICOKKaueCTBeHHoe N3O6paXeHne fOpMaTa DV.

EcIn BO Bpem 3aIncn Ha BVideomarHHTOfoHe BOCPpon3BOaTcpa3NlUHbIe 3nn3OdbI

3aIINcIbAeMoE I3O6paXeHHe MOKeT 6bITb Hepe3KIM.

O pexnme npnbTa dncTaHcnoHnHoro ynpablenia

3Ta BnDeOkamepa pa6oTaetB pexmme nyIbTa DnCTaHnOHHoro ynpabLeHnVTR2. Pexmbl nyIbTa DnCTaHnOHHoro ynpaBHeN1,2 3 NcNoIb3yIOcTc dIa OTNIuHa DaHHOB BnDEOkAmepebl OT dpYrXs BnDEomarHnTOpOHOB cInpMb SOny BO n36eKaHne HnPaBnIbHO np60tbl npIbTa DnCTaHnOHHoro ynpabLeHnE. Ecn nCNoIb3yeTc DpyRo BnDEOMarHnTOpOH fnpMb SOny,pa6oTaUoUsn B pexmVe VTR2, peKomeHdyeTcra N3MeHnb TpeXm PnlbTa DnCTaHnOHHo r ynpABnE Hn 3aKpbITb DaTChk DnCTaHnOHHoro ynpabHeN BnDEomarHnTOpOHa YepHO bymarOI.

06 nHdEChOM cnHaJe

The index mark is recorded immediately after recording starts. If the index mark is recorded using the INDEX MARK button during recording, the "LINE" indicator appears on the INDEX SEARCH screen, and the index mark is recorded in the cassette memory.

Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied) to DV IN/OUT and to DV IN/OUT of the DV products. With digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing.

(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into your camcorder, and insert the recorded tape into the VCR. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder. (3) Set DISPLAY in ETC to LCD in the menu settings (p. 154). (4) Press MENU to erase the menu display. (5) Press REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder, then immediately press STOP on your camcorder. (6) Press PLAY on the VCR to start playback. The picture to be recorded appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (7) Press PAUSE on your camcorder at the scene from which you want to start recording.

Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not included) to the DV IN/OUT jack and the DV IN/OUT jack of the DV devices. The digital connection transmits video and audio signals digitally, ensuring high-quality editing.

(1) Insert the blank tape (the tape on which recording is to be made) into the camcorder, and the recorded tape into the VCR. (2) Set the POWER switch on the camcorder to VCR. (3) Set the DISPLAY command in the menu settings to LCD (p. 154). (4) Press the MENU button to remove the menu display. (5) Simultaneously press the REC button and the button to its right on the camcorder, then immediately press the button on the camcorder. (6) Press the button on the VCR to start playback. The image to be recorded will appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (7) Press the button on the camcorder at the point from which recording should start.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Use of cable.LINK (connecting cable DV) - 1

Recording video or TV programs

When you have finished recording

Press STOP on both your camcorder and the VCR.

Using the Remote Commander

In step 5, press REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press STOP. And in step 7, press PAUSE at the scene from which you want to start recording.

You can connect only one VCR using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)

When you dub a picture in digital form, the colour of the display may be uneven. However, this does not affect the dubbed picture.

If you record a still picture in playback pause mode via the DV IN/OUT jack

The recorded picture becomes rough. And when you play back the picture using your camcorder, the picture may jitter.

Before recording

Press DISPLAY and make sure that the DV IN indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. The DV IN indicator may appear on both pieces of equipment.

On the commander mode

Your camcorder works in the commander mode, VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3 are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid remote control misoperation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2, we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with black paper.

Recording a program

After finishing recording

Press the button on the camcorder and on the VCR.

Using the remote commander

Press the button simultaneously

Press REC and MARK, then immediately press II. In step 7, press III at the point where you want to start recording.

Using the DV cable (DV connecting cable), you can connect only one VCR

Editing pictures in digital video

The color of the picture may be uneven. However, this does not affect the quality of the transmitted picture.

Freeze the still picture during pause playback through the DV IN/OUT jack

The recorded image will be unclear. Reproduction of images from this video camera may be poor.

Before recording

Press the DISPLAY button and check that the DV IN indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. The DV IN indicator may appear on both devices.

About the remote control mode

This video camera operates in remote control mode 2. Remote control modes 1, 2, and 3 are used to distinguish this video camera from other video tape recorders to avoid incorrect remote control operation. If another video tape recorder that operates in mode 2 is used, it is recommended to change the remote control mode or cover the remote sensor of the video tape recorder with opaque paper.

Inserting a scene from a VCR - Insert editing

Inserting a scene from a VCR - Insert editing

You can insert a new scene from a VCR onto your originally recorded tape by specifying the insert start and end points. Use the Remote Commander for this operation. Connections are the same as on page 105 or 126. Insert a cassette containing the desired scene into the VCR.

To insert a new episode with a videomagnetic tape onto an already recorded tape, specify the locations of its beginning and end. To perform this operation, use the remote control. The data connection is analogous to that described on pages 105 or 126. Insert the cassette with the required episode into the videomagnetic tape.

[A]SONY DCR-VX2000E - Inserting a scene from a VCR - Insert editing - 1

[B]SONY DCR-VX2000E - Inserting a scene from a VCR - Insert editing - 2

[C]SONY DCR-VX2000E - Inserting a scene from a VCR - Insert editing - 3

[A]: The tape that contains the scene to be superimposed [B]: The tape to be edited [C]: The tape after editing

[A]: Tape containing the scene to be inserted [B]: Tape for editing [C]: Tape after editing

Inserting a scene from a VCR - Insert editing

Insertion tab with a built-in stop - insertion type

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder. (2) On the VCR, locate a point just before the insert start point [a], then press to set the VCR to the playback pause mode. (3) On your camcorder, locate the insert end point [c] by pressing or . Then press to set it to the playback pause mode. (4) Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander. The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator flashes and the end point of the insert is stored in memory. The tape counter shows "0:00:00." If the tape counter does not appear, press DISPLAY. (5) On your camcorder, locate the insert start point [b] by pressing , then press REC and the button on its right simultaneously, then immediately press on your camcorder. (6) First press on the VCR, and after a few seconds press on your camcorder to start inserting the new scene. Inserting automatically stops near the zero point on the tape counter. Your camcorder automatically returns to the recording pause mode.

(1) Set the POWER switch on the video camera to VCR. (2) On the video monitor, find the point where the insert will be placed [a], then press the I button to set the video monitor to playback pause mode. (3) On the video camera, find the end of the insert [c] by pressing the I or N button. Then press the I button to set it to playback pause mode. (4) Press the ZERO SET MEMORY button on the remote control. The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator will flash, and the insert end point will be stored in memory. The counter display will become "0:00:00". If the counter does not appear, press the DISPLAY button. (5) On the video camera, find the start point of the insert [b] by pressing the button, then simultaneously press the REC button and the button to its right, and immediately press the button on the video camera. (6) First press the button on the video monitor, then after a few seconds, press the button on the video camera to start the new insert recording. The insert will stop automatically at the zero point of the counter. The video camera will automatically return to recording pause mode.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Insertion tab with a built-in stop - insertion type - 1

Inserting a scene from a VCR - Insert editing

To change the insert end point

Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander again after step 5 to erase the ZERO SET MEMORY indicator and begin from step 3.

Using the Remote Commander

In step 5, press REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press. And in step 6, press at the scene from which you want to start recording.

Note

The picture and sound recorded on the portion between the insert start and end points will be erased when you insert the new scene.

If you insert scenes on the tape recorded with an other camcorder (including an other DCR-VX2000E)

The picture and sound may be distorted. We recommend that you insert scenes on a tape recorded with your camcorder.

When the inserted picture is played back The picture and sound may be distorted at t end of the inserted portion. This is not a malfunction.

The picture and sound at the start point and the end point may be distorted in the LP mode.

To insert a scene without setting the insert end point

Skip steps 3 and 4. Press when you want to stop inserting.

Inserting a scene from a video tape - Insert editing

To change the insert end point

The picture and sound recorded on the tape between the start and end points of the insert will be erased when inserting a new scene.

When inserting scenes onto a tape recorded on another video camera (including another DCR-VX2000E camera)

The picture and sound may be distorted. It is recommended to insert scenes onto a tape recorded with this video camera.

To check the inserted picture

You can record an audio sound to add to the original sound on a tape by connecting audio equipment or a microphone. If you connect audio equipment, you can add sound to your recorded tape by specifying the starting and ending points. The original sound will not be erased. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation.

Connecting the microphone with the MIC jack

Audio dubbing

You can add sound to an audio recording on tape, connecting an audio player or microphone to the original sound. If you connect an audio player, you can add sound to the recorded tape by specifying the start and end points. The original sound will not be erased. For this operation, you can also use the remote control.

You can check the picture on TV by connecting with the video jack. You cannot monitor the additional sound by the speaker. Use the headphone jack.

Connecting the audio equipment with the MIC jack

Connecting the audio equipment using the MIC jack

Signal flowSONY DCR-VX2000E - Connecting the audio equipment using the MIC jack - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Connecting the audio equipment using the MIC jack - 2

Connecting the microphone with the intelligent accessory shoe

We recommend that you use the gun microphone. If the microphone can select the zoom microphone type, set it to the gun microphone position.

Dubbing with the AUDIO L/R jacks

Recording with the AUDIO L/R jacks

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Recording with the AUDIO L/R jacks - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Recording with the AUDIO L/R jacks - 2

Signal flow

Signal flow

Audio equipment (not supplied)

AUDIO L

LINE OUT

L

R

AUDIO R

Do not connect the video (yellow) plug.

Dubbing with the supplied microphone

No connection is necessary.

Notes

  • When dubbing with the built-in microphone or an external one, you can check the recorded picture on the LCD screen, in the viewfinder, or on the screen of equipment connected with the VIDEO jack, and you can check the recorded sound by using headphones.
  • When dubbing with the AUDIO L/R jacks, you can check the recorded picture on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, and you can check the recorded sound by using headphones.
  • You can check both the original sound and new sound that will be dubbed, with headphones.
  • You can adjust the balance of the new sound and original sound using AUDIO MIX in the menu settings. You can monitor the sound using headphones during audio dubbing.

Dubbing with the supplied microphone

No connection is necessary.

Notes

- When dubbing with the built-in microphone or an external one, you can check the recorded picture on the LCD screen, in the viewfinder, or on the screen of equipment connected with the VIDEO jack, and you can check the recorded sound by using headphones. - When dubbing with the AUDIO L/R jacks, you can check the recorded picture on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, and you can check the recorded sound by using headphones. - You can check both the original sound and new sound that will be dubbed, with headphones. - You can adjust the balance of the new sound and original sound using AUDIO MIX in the menu settings. You can monitor the sound using headphones during audio dubbing.

Adding an audio sound on a recorded tape

(1) Insert the recorded tape into your camcorder. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder. (3) Locate the recording start point by pressing. Then press at the point where you want to start recording to set your camcorder to the playback pause mode. (4) Press AUDIO DUB. The green indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (5) Press I and start playing back the audio you want to record at the same time. The new sound is recorded in stereo 2 (ST2) during playback. (6) Press at the point where you want to stop recording.

Audio dubbing

Adding an audio signal to a recorded tape

(1) Insert the recorded tape into the camcorder. (2) Set the POWER switch on the camcorder to VCR. (3) Press the PLAY button to start playback, then press the PAUSE button at the point where you want to start recording to put the camcorder in playback pause mode. (4) Press the AUDIO DUB button. The green indicator appears on the screen and in the viewfinder. (5) Press the PLAY button and simultaneously start playing the audio you want to record. The new sound will be recorded in stereo 2 (ST2) during playback. (6) Press the PAUSE button at the point where you want to end the recording.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Adding an audio signal to a recorded tape - 1

Monitoring the new recorded sound

To play back the sound

Adjust the balance between the original sound (ST1) and the new sound (ST2) by selecting AUDIO MIX in the menu settings (p. 154).

Monitoring the new recorded sound

To play back the sound

You can compare the difference between the original sound (ST1) and the new sound (ST2) by selecting the AUDIO MIX command in the menu settings (page 154).

SONY DCR-VX2000E - To play back the sound - 1

If you wait five minutes after you disconnect the power source or remove the battery pack, the setting of AUDIO MIX returns to the original sound (ST1) only. The default setting is for original sound only.

Notes

  • New sound cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the 16-bit mode (p. 159).
  • New sound cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the LP mode.
  • You cannot add audio with the DVI/OUT jack.

If you make all the connections

The audio input to be recorded will take precedence over others in the following order.

  • MIC (PLUG IN POWER) jack
  • Intelligent accessory shoe
  • AUDIO L/R jacks Built-in microphone

If an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied) is connected to your camcorder, you cannot add sound to a recorded tape.

If you disconnect the power source or the battery pack, the AUDIO MIX setting returns to the original sound (ST1). The default setting is intended only for the original sound.

Notes

  • New sound cannot be recorded on a tape recorded in 16-bit mode (p. 165).
  • New sound cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in LP mode.
  • You cannot add sound through the DV IN/OUT jack.

If you have made all connections

The input sound will have priority over other signals in the following order.

MIC jack (PLUG IN POWER) Accessory shoe - AUDIO L/R jacks - Built-in microphone

You cannot add sound to a recorded tape.

If you set the write-protect tab of the tape to lock

You cannot record on the tape. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection.

We recommend that you add new sound on a tape recorded with your camcorder. If you add new sound on a tape recorded with another camcorder (including another DCR-VX2000E), the sound quality may deteriorate.

To add new sound more precisely, press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander at the point where you want to stop recording later in playback mode. Then, follow the procedure from step 3. Recording automatically stops at the point where ZERO SET MEMORY was pressed.

On blank portions

You cannot add audio.

You can adjust the recording level manually using the recording adjustment display in the following cases:

  • Dubbing with an optional external microphone or audio equipment through the MIC jack
  • Dubbing with an optional external microphone installed into the intelligent accessory shoe
  • Dubbing with the internal microphone

Superimposing a title

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Superimposing a title - 1

If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can superimpose the title while recording or after recording. When you play back the tape, the title is displayed for five seconds from the point where you superimposed it.

You can select one of eight preset titles and two custom titles (p. 147).

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Superimposing a title - 2

If you use a unit with cassette memory, you can superimpose titles during recording or after recording. If you play back the unit, the title will be displayed for five seconds from the point where you superimposed it.

You can select one of the eight preset titles or two custom titles (p. 147).

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Superimposing a title - 3

You can also select the colour, size and position of titles.

You can also choose the light, size, and position of the LEDs.

(1) Press TITLE to display the title menu in standby, recording, playback, or playback pause mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired setting, then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired title, then press the dial. The title flashes. (4) Change the colour, size, or position, if necessary.

① Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the COLOUR, SIZE, or POSITION, then press the dial. The item appears. ② Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial. ③ Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the title is laid out as desired.

(5) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial again to complete the setting.

In playback, playback pause, or recording mode:

The "TITLE SAVE" indicator appears on the screen for five seconds and the title is set.

In standby mode:

The "TITLE" indicator appears. When you press START/STOP to start recording,

"TITLE SAVE" appears on the screen for five seconds and the title is set.

(1) Press the TITLE button to display titles in the standby, recording, or playback/pause mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the setting, then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired title, then press the dial. The title will start flashing. (4) Change the text, size, or position of the title if necessary.

Reproduction, playback pauses and recording:

The title will be saved on the screen when the "TITLE SAVE" indicator is displayed, and the title setting will be completed.

In standby mode:

If you set the write-protect tab to lock

You cannot superimpose or erase the title.

Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection.

To use a custom title

If you want to use the custom title, select in step 2.

If the tape has a blank portion

You cannot superimpose a title on that portion.

If the tape has a blank portion in the middle of the recorded parts

The title may not be displayed correctly.

If the write-protect tab is set to the write-protect position

You will not be able to superimpose or erase the title. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection.

To use a custom title

If you leave an unrecorded section

In this section, the tape may be damaged.

If you leave an unrecorded section between recorded sections

The tape may be displayed incorrectly.

The titles superimposed with your camcorder

  • They are displayed only on the DV™ format video equipment with the index title function.
  • The point you superimposed the title may be detected as an index signal when searching a recording with other video equipment.

To not display titles

Set TITLE DSPL to OFF in the menu settings (p. 154).

Title setting

  • The title colour changes as follows: WHITE ↔ YELLOW ↔ VIOLET ↔ RED ↔ CYAN ↔ GREEN ↔ BLUE
  • The title size changes as follows: SMALL ↔ LARGE. You cannot input more than 12 characters in LARGE size.
  • If you select the title size "SMALL," you have nine choices for the title position.

If you select the title size "LARGE," you have eight choices for the title position.

If the "FULL" mark appears

The cassette memory is full. If you erase the title, index data, date data, photo data, or cassette label in the cassette, you can then superimpose a title.

Titles superimposed using your camcorder

  • They are displayed only on video equipment of the DV format with the title index function.
  • The title position can be detected by the index signal when searching for a recording using another video equipment.

To cancel title display

Set the TITLE DSPL command to OFF in the menu settings (p. 154).

Title setting

  • The title color changes in the following order: WHITE ↔ YELLOW ↔ VIOLET ↔ RED ↔ CYAN ↔ GREEN ↔ BLUE
  • The title size changes in the following order: SMALL ↔ LARGE

When the large size is selected, you cannot enter more than 12 characters. - If the "SMALL" size is selected, you can choose one of nine character types in the title position.

If the "LARGE" size is selected, you can choose one of eight character types in the title position.

If the indicator "FULL" appears

The cassette label has been overwritten. If the label on the cassette is erased, index data, date information, photo data, or cassette marking, then after this, the label can be applied.

Erasing a title

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TITLE ERASE, then press the dial. The title erase display appears. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the title you want to erase, then press the dial. The "ERASE OK?" indicator appears. (6) Make sure the title is the one you want to erase, and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. "OK" changes to "EXECUTE." (7) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. "ERASING" flashes for about two seconds and "COMPLETE" appears after erasing the title.

Title erase

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA. (2) Press the MENU button to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the setting, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TITLE ERASE, then press the dial. The title erase indicator appears. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the title to be erased, then press the dial. The "ERASE OK ?" indicator appears. (6) Make sure that this is the title you want to erase, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, and press the dial. The "OK" indicator changes to "EXECUTE". (7) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The "ERASING" indicator flashes for about a few seconds, and after erasing, the "COMPLETE" indicator appears.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Title erase - 1

To cancel erasing

Select RETURN in step 6 or 7, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

To erase all the titles

See "Erasing the cassette memory data" on page 151.

To cancel erasing

Select RETURN in step 6 or 7, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

To erase all the titles

See section "Cassette memory data erasure" on page 151.

Making your own titles

CM only

You can make up to two titles and store them in cassette memory. Each title can have up to 20 characters.

(1) Press TITLE in the standby, playback, or playback pause mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the dial. (6) Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have selected all characters and completed the title. (7) To finish making your own titles, turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [SET], then press the dial. The title is stored in memory. (8) Press TITLE to erase the title menu display.

Making your own titles

CM only

You can create no more than two titles and save them in memory. Each title can contain up to 20 characters.

(1) Press the TITLE button while the display is in the standby state, then press the TITLE button again. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the setting, then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the column with the desired character, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the dial. (6) Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have selected all the characters and completely composed the title. (7) To finish composing your own titles, turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the [SET] command, then press the dial. The title will be saved in memory. (8) Press the TITLE button to return to the title menu display.

1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 1 - 1

PRESET TITLE

HELLO!

HAPPY HOLIDAYS

CONGRATULATIONS!

OUR SWEET BABY

WEDDING VACATION THE END

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 1 - 2

2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 2 - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 2 - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 2 - 3

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 2 - 4

3

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 3 - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 3 - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 3 - 3

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 3 - 4

4-6

1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 1 - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 1 - 2

2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 2 - 1

TITLE SET

ABCDE 12345

FGHIJ 67890

KLMNO 7

[PPRS] [←]

QWY 7821

2017

3

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 3 - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 3 - 2

4

SONY DCR-VX2000E - 4 - 1

TITLE SET

S

ABCDE 12345

FGHIJ 67890

KLMNO

PQFST[←]

UVWXY

Z& ?!

To change a title you have stored

In step 3, select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, depending on which title you want to change, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [<], then press the dial to delete the title. The last character is erased. Enter a new title as desired.

If you take five minutes or longer to enter characters in standby mode while a cassette is in your camcorder, the power automatically goes off

The characters you have entered remain stored in memory. Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) once and then follow the procedure from step 7 again.

We recommend setting the operation in playback or playback pause mode or removing the cassette so that your camcorder does not automatically turn off while you are entering title characters.

To erase a character

Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [←] then press the dial. The last character is erased.

To enter a space

Select [Z& ?!], then select the blank part.

Creating your own titles

Changing a stored title

Select the desired setting using the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, then press the dial. The last character will be deleted. Enter the new title.

If the character input takes more than a certain time, the camera will automatically turn off.

The characters you entered are saved in the camera's memory. Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), then repeat the procedure from step 7.

It is recommended to set the playback mode to pause during playback to prevent the camcorder from automatically turning off while entering title characters.

To delete a character

Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the [←] setting, then press the dial. The last character will be deleted.

To enter a space

Select [Z& ?!], then select the desired character.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - To enter a space - 1

If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can label a cassette. The label can consist of up to 10 characters and is

stored in cassette memory. When you insert the labelled cassette and set the POWER switch to VCR, CAMERA, or MEMORY, the label is displayed for about five seconds.

(1) Insert the cassette you want to label. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA. (3) Press MENU to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE TITLE, then press the dial. The tape title display appears. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character, then press the dial. (7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the dial. (8) Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you finish the label. (9) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [SET], then press the dial. The label is stored in memory.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - To enter a space - 2

When using a tape with cassette memory, you can label the cassette. The label can consist of up to 10 characters and is stored in cassette memory. When you insert the labelled cassette and set the POWER switch to VCR, CAMERA, or MEMORY, the label is displayed for about five seconds.

(1) Select the tape you want to mark. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA. (3) Press the MENU button to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the [a] setting, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the TITLE SET setting, then press the dial. The title mark selection screen appears. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the column with the desired character, then press the dial. (7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the dial. (8) Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you complete the marking. (9) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the [SET] command, then press the dial. The marking is saved in memory.

2SONY DCR-VX2000E - To enter a space - 3

6-8SONY DCR-VX2000E - To enter a space - 4

SONY DCR-VX2000E - To enter a space - 5

SONY DCR-VX2000E - To enter a space - 6

4,5SONY DCR-VX2000E - To enter a space - 7

SONY DCR-VX2000E - To enter a space - 8

SONY DCR-VX2000E - To enter a space - 9

SONY DCR-VX2000E - To enter a space - 10

To change the label you have made

Insert the cassette to change the label, and operate in the same way as you do to make a new label.

If you set the write-protect tab of the tape to lock

You cannot label the tape. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection.

If you have superimposed titles in the cassette

When the label is displayed, up to four titles also appear.

When the "-----" indicator has fewer than 10 spaces

The cassette memory is full.

The "-----" indicates the number of characters you can select for the label.

To erase a character

Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [← ] then press the dial. The last character is erased.

To enter a space

Select [Z& ?!], then select the blank part.

Cassette labeling

To change the marking

Insert the cassette whose marking is to be changed, and perform the same operations as for creating a new marking.

If the write-protect tab is set to the protect position

You will not be able to perform marking. Move the write-protect tab to the release position to disable protection.

If you have performed the operations on the cassette

When the marking is displayed, the four indicators are also displayed.

If the indicator "----" contains less than 10 characters

The cassette tape has been rewound.

The indicator "----" shows the number of characters that can be selected for marking.

To erase a character

Erasing the cassette memory data

You can erase data stored in cassette memory, each item's data can be erased separately. You can also erase all items' data once.

Erasing the cassette memory data

The data stored in the cassette memory can be erased, and the data of each element must be erased separately. You can also erase the data of all elements at the same time.

Erasing the cassette memory data

Erasing each item's data separately

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA. (2) Press MENU to display the menu display. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ITEM ERASE, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the item that you want to erase its data, then press the dial.

ItemMeaning
INDEX ALLErases all the index data.
TITLE ALLErases all the title data.
DATE ALLErases all the date data.
PHOTO ALLErases all the photo data.

(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. "OK" changes to "EXECUTE." (7) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. "ERASING" flashes for about two seconds and "COMPLETE" appears after erasing the selected item's data.

Erasing the cassette memory data

Erasing each item's data separately

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR/CAMERA. (2) Press the MENU button to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the [M] setting, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the ITEM ERASE command, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the element whose data is to be erased, then press the dial.

Злем entНазнayениe
INDEX ALLСтupaeted几乎所有��аьные дань们的.
TITLE ALLСтupaeted几乎所有��аь们的 ТИТРов.
DATE ALLСтupaeted几乎所有��аь们的 Дд.
PHOTO ALLСтupaeted几乎所有��аь们的 Фото.

(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the setting OK, then press the dial. The indication "OK" changes to "EXECUTE". (7) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The indication "ERASING" flashes for about two seconds, and after erasing the selected element, the indication "COMPLETE" appears.

Erasing the cassette memory data

Erasing the cassette memory data

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Erasing the cassette memory data - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Erasing the cassette memory data - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Erasing the cassette memory data - 3

To cancel erasing

Select RETURN in step 6 or 7, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

Erasing all the data in cassette memory

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA. (2) Press MENU to display the menu display. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. "OK" changes to "EXECUTE." (6) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. "ERASING" flashes for about two seconds and "COMPLETE" appears after erasing all the data.

To cancel erasing

Select RETURN in step 5 or 6, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

To cancel erasing

Select RETURN in step 6, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

Erasing all data in the cassette memory

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the setting, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. "OK" changes to "EXECUTE". (6) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The "ERASING" indicator appears for about two seconds, and after erasing all data, the "COMPLETE" indicator appears.

To cancel erasing

Select RETURN in step 5, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

- Customizing Your Camcorder - Changing the menu settings

To change the mode settings in the menu settings, select the menu items with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The default settings can be partially changed. First, select the icon, then the menu item and then the mode.

(1) In standby, or when the POWER switch is set to VCR or MEMORY, press MENU. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired icon, then press the dial to set it. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial to set it. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, then press the dial to set it. (5) If you want to change other items, select RETURN and press the dial, then repeat steps 2 to 4.

For details, see "Selecting the mode setting of each item" (p. 156).

- Selecting individual settings on the camcorder -

To make the menu display disappear

Press MENU.

Menu items are displayed as the following icons:

MANUAL SET C CAMERA SET VCR SET LCD/VF SET MEMORY SET CM SET TAPE SET SETUP MENU ETC OTHERS

To hide the indication, press the MENU button.

Press the MENU button.

The menu items are displayed as pictograms shown below:

MANUAL SET CAMERA SET VCR SET LCD/VF SET MEMORY SET CM SET TAPE SET SETUP MENU ETC OTHERS

English

Selecting the mode setting of each item

● is the default setting.

Menu items differ depending on the position of the POWER switch.

The LCD screen or viewfinder screen shows only the items you can operate at the moment.

Icon/itemModeMeaningPOWER switch
AUTO SHTRONTo automatically adjust the electronic shutter speed.CAMERA
OFFTo fix the electronic shutter speed.MEMORY
PROG. SCANOFFRecords still/moving pictures in the interlace format.CAMERA
ONRecords still/moving pictures in progressive mode.
D ZOOMOFFTo deactivate the digital zoom. Up to 12× zoom is carried out.CAMERA
24×To activate the digital zoom. More than 12× zoom is performed digitally. This value goes up to 24× (p. 30).
48×To activate the digital zoom. More than 12× zoom is performed digitally. This value goes up to 48× (p. 30).
16:9WIDEOFFTo not record a 16:9 wide picture.CAMERA
ONTo record a 16:9 wide picture (p. 53).
STEADYSHOTONTo compensate for camera-shake.CAMERA
OFFTo cancel the SteadyShot function. Natural pictures are produced when shooting a stationary object with a tripod.MEMORY

Notes on the SteadyShot function

  • The SteadyShot function will not correct excessive camera-shake.
  • Attachment of a conversion lens (not supplied) may influence the SteadyShot function.

If you cancel the SteadyShot function

The SteadyShot OFF indicator appears. Your camcorder prevents excessive compensation for camera-shake.

Icon/itemModeMeaningPOWER switch
FRAME REC● OFFDoes not make a cut recording.CAMERA
ONMakes a cut recording (p. 87).
INT. RECONMakes an interval recording (p. 83).CAMERA
● OFFDoes not make an interval recording.
SETSets the interval time and recording time.
HIFI SOUND● STEREOTo play back a stereo tape or dual sound track tape with main and sub sound (p. 212).VCR
1To play back a stereo tape with the left sound or a dual sound tape with main sound.
2To play back a stereo tape with the right sound or a dual sound track tape with sub sound.
AUDIO MIXTo adjust the balance between the stereo 1 and stereo 2 (p. 139).VCR
ST1 ▲ ST2
A/V→DV OUT● OFFTo output analog images in digital format using your camcorder.VCR
ONTo output digital images in analog format using your camcorder.
NTSC PB● ON PAL TVTo play back a tape recorded on your camcorder on a PAL system TV.VCR
NTSC 4.43To play back a tape recorded in the NTSC colour system on a TV with the NTSC 4.43 mode.
LCD B. L.● BRT NORMALTo set the brightness on the LCD screen to normal.VCR
BRIGHTTo brighten the LCD screen.CAMERA MEMORY
LCD COLOURTo adjust the colour on the LCD screen with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.VCR
To get low-intensityCAMERA MEMORY
VF B.L.● BRT NORMALTo set the brightness on the viewfinder screen to normal.VCR
BRIGHTTo brighten the viewfinder screen.CAMERA
GUIDEFRAME● OFFDoes not display the guide frame.CAMERA
ONDisplays the guide frame (p. 52).MEMORY

Notes on LCD B.L. and VF B.L. - When you select "BRIGHT," battery life is reduced a little during recording. - When you use power sources other than the battery pack, "BRIGHT" is automatically selected.

Icon/itemModeMeaningPOWER switch
CONTINUOUSOFFNot to record continuously.MEMORY
ONTo record four images continuously (p. 178).
MULTI SCRNTo record nine images continuously (p. 178).
QUALITYSUPER FINETo record still images in the super fine image quality mode, using a “Memory Stick” (p. 174).VCR MEMORY
FINETo record still images in the fine image quality mode, using a “Memory Stick” (p. 174).
STANDARDTo record still images in the standard image quality mode, using a “Memory Stick” (p. 174).
PRINT MARKOFFTo erase print marks on still images.VCR MEMORY
ONTo write a print mark on the recorded still images you want to print out later.
PROTECTOFFTo release protection from still images.VCR MEMORY
ONTo protect selected still images against accidental erasure (p. 202).
SLIDE SHOWTo play back all the images as a slide show (p. 200).MEMORY
DELETE ALLTo delete all unprotected images (p. 206).MEMORY
FORMATRETURNTo cancel formatting.MEMORY
OKTo format an inserted “Memory Stick.” 1. Select FORMAT with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, then press the dial. 2. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. 3. After “EXECUTE” appears, press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. “FORMATTING” appears during formatting. “COMPLETE” appears when formatting is finished.
PHOTO SAVETo duplicate images on a mini DV tape onto a “Memory Stick” (p. 191).VCR

Formatting erases all information on the "Memory Stick"

Check the contents of the "Memory Stick" before formatting:

  • Formatting erases sample images on the "Memory Stick."
  • Formatting erases the protected image data on the "Memory Stick."

Notes on formatting

  • Supplied or optional "Memory Stick"s have been formatted at the factory. Formatting with this camcorder is not required.
  • While the display shows "FORMATTING," do not turn the POWER switch, press any button, or eject a "Memory Stick."
  • You cannot format a "Memory Stick" if the write-protect tab on the "Memory Stick" is set to LOCK.
  • Format again if the message "☑" appears.

If formatting fails

The "FORMAT ERROR" message appears.

Icon/itemModeMeaningPOWER switch
CM SEARCHONTo search using cassette memory (p. 93, 95, 97, 100).VCR
OFFTo search without using cassette memory.
TAPE TITLETo label a cassette (p. 149).VCR CAMERA
TITLE DSPLONTo display the title you have superimposed.VCR
OFFNot to display the title.
TITLEERASETo erase the title you have superimposed (p. 145).VCR CAMERA
ITEM ERASETo erase each item's data in cassette memory (p. 151).VCR CAMERA
ERASE ALLTo erase all the data in cassette memory (p. 153).VCR CAMERA
REC MODE● SPTo record in the SP (Standard Play) mode.VCR CAMERA
LPTo increase the recording time to 1.5 times the SP mode.
AUDIO MODE● 12BITTo record in 12-bit mode (two stereo sounds).VCR CAMERA
16BITTo record in 16-bit mode (one stereo sound with high quality).

Notes on the LP mode

  • When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing back the tape on your camcorder. When you play back the tape on other camcorders or VCRs, noise may occur in pictures or sound.
  • When you record in the LP mode, we recommend using a Sony Excellence/Master mini DV cassette so that you can get the most out of your camcorder.
  • You cannot make audio dubbing on a tape recorded in the LP mode. Use the SP mode for the tape to be audio-dubbed.
  • When you record in SP and LP modes on one tape, or when you record some scenes in LP mode, the playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly between scenes.

Notes on AUDIO MODE

  • You cannot dub an audio sound onto a tape recorded in 16-bit mode.
  • When playing back a tape recorded in 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the balance in AUDIO MIX.

Changing the menu settings

Icon/itemModeMeaningPOWER switch
○○REMAIN● AUTOTo display the remaining tape indication: • for about eight seconds after your camcorder is turned on and calculates the remaining amount of tape • for about eight seconds after a cassette is inserted and your camcorder calculates the remaining amount of tape • for about eight seconds after ▲ is pressed in VCR mode • for about eight seconds after DISPLAY is pressed to display the screen indicators • for the period of tape rewinding, forwarding or picture search in the VCR modeVCR CAMERA
ONTo always display the remaining tape indicator.
DATA CODE● DATE/CAMTo display date, time and various settings during playback.VCR
DATETo display date and time during playback.
MIC LEVEL● AUTOAdjusts audio recording level automatically.VCR
MANUALAdjusts audio recording level manually (p. 73).CAMERA
○○CLOCK SETTo reset the date or time (p. 168).CAMERA MEMORY
LTR SIZE● NORMALTo display selected menu items in normal size.VCR
To display selected menu items at twice the normal size.CAMERA MEMORY
DEMO MODE● ONTo make the demonstration appear.CAMERA
OFFTo cancel the demonstration mode.
ETC WORLD TIMETo set the clock to the local time. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to set a time difference. The clock changes by the time difference you set here. If you set the time difference to 0, the clock returns to the originally set time.CAMERA MEMORY

Notes on DEMO MODE

  • You cannot select DEMO MODE when a cassette is inserted in your camcorder.
  • DEMO MODE is set to STBY (Standby) at the factory, and the demonstration starts about 10 minutes after you set the POWER switch to CAMERA without a cassette inserted. To cancel the demonstration, insert a cassette, set the POWER switch to a position other than CAMERA, or set DEMO MODE to OFF.
Icon/itemModeMeaningPOWER switch
ETCBEEP● MELODYTo chime a melody in normal operations, and beep a warning sound for five seconds.VCR CAMERA
NORMALTo beep in the following situations: turning on the power, pressing the start/stop button, and when a warning message appears.MEMORY
OFFTo cancel the melody, beep, and shutter click sound.
COMMANDER● ONTo activate the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder.VCR CAMERA
OFFTo deactivate the Remote Commander to avoid remote control misoperation caused by an other VCR's remote control.MEMORY
DISPLAY● LCDTo show the display on the LCD screen and viewfinder screen.VCR CAMERA
V-OUT/LCDTo show the display on a TV screen, LCD screen and viewfinder screen.MEMORY
REC LAMP● ONTo light up the camera recording lamps at the front and rear of your camcorder.CAMERA MEMORY
OFFTo turn the camera recording lamps off.
COLOUR BAR● OFFDoes not display the colour bar.CAMERA
ONDisplays the colour bar.
VIDEO EDITTo make programs and perform video editing (p. 121).VCR
EDIT SETTo adjust and set the synchronization of your camcorder and a VCR for dubbing in video program editing mode (p. 110).VCR

Note

If you press DISPLAY with DISPLAY set to V-OUT/LCD in the menu settings, the picture from a TV or VCR will not appear on the LCD screen even when your camcorder is connected to the outputs of the TV or VCR (except when using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)).

When recording a close subject

When REC LAMP is set to ON, the red camera recording lamps on the front and rear of the camcorder may reflect on the subject if it is close. In this case, we recommend you set REC LAMP to OFF.

After more than five minutes after removing the power source

The "PROG. SCAN," "HiFi SOUND," "AUDIO MIX," "MIC LEVEL," and "COMMANDER" items are returned to their default settings.

The other menu items are held in memory even when the power source is removed.

Russian

Selecting the recording mode of the image elements

by default.

The setting is

The menu items differ depending on the position of the playback/recording switch.

On the LCD screen and in the viewfinder, only the elements that can be operated at the moment are displayed.

Notes on formatting

The "Memory Stick" supplied with the camcorder is formatted at the factory. Formatting on this camcorder is not required. - While the "FORMATTING" indicator is displayed, do not turn the POWER switch, do not press any buttons, and do not remove the "Memory Stick". - Do not format the "Memory Stick" if the write-protect tab is set to LOCK. - If the "√" indication appears, perform the formatting again.

Resetting the date and time

The default clock setting is set to London time for United Kingdom, and to Paris time for the other European countries.

If you do not use your camcorder for about four months, the date and time settings may be released (bars may appear) because the vanadium-lithium battery installed in your camcorder will have been discharged (p. 236). First, set the year, then the month, the day, the hour and then the minute.

(1) Press MENU to display the menu in the standby mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select, then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CLOCK SET, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust to the desired year, then press the dial. (5) Set the month, day and hour by turning the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the dial. (6) Set the minute by turning the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the dial by the time signal. The clock starts to move. (7) Press MENU to erase the menu display.

If the camcorder has not been used for about four months, the date and time settings may disappear (a bar appears), because the vanadium-lithium battery installed in the camcorder is discharged (p. 236).

First set the year, then the month, day, hour and minute.

(1) Press the MENU key to display the menu in standby mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the setting, then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the CLOCK SET command, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, then press the dial. (5) While turning the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial and pressing it, set the month, day, and hour. (6) Set the minutes by turning the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial and pressing it at the moment of the time signal. The clock will start functioning. (7) Press the MENU key to remove the menu indication.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Resetting the date and time - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Resetting the date and time - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Resetting the date and time - 3

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Resetting the date and time - 4

The year changes as follows:

The year changes as follows:

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Resetting the date and time - 5

If you do not set the date and time

"---:---:" (time) and "-------" (date) are recorded on the data code of the tape and the "Memory Stick."

Note on the time indicator

The internal clock of your camcorder operates on a 24-hour cycle.

If you do not set the date and time

In the data code on the tape and the "Memory Stick," the indication "---:---:" (time) and "-------" (date) will be recorded.

Note on the time indicator

The built-in clock of this video camera operates in a 24-hour cycle.

— "Memory Stick" Operations — Using a "Memory Stick" - introduction

You can record and play back still images on the "Memory Stick" supplied with your camcorder. You can easily play back, record or delete still images. You can exchange image data with other equipment such as a personal computer etc., using the Memory Stick Reader/Writer supplied with your camcorder or a PC card adaptor for Memory Stick (not supplied).

On file format (JPEG)

Your camcorder compresses image data in JPEG format (extension .jpg).

Typical image data file name

100-0001: As displayed on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder of the camcorder.

Dsc00001.jpg: As displayed on your PC screen.

- Using a "Memory Stick" -

Using a "Memory Stick" - Introduction

You can record and play back still images on the "Memory Stick" supplied with the camcorder. You can easily play back, record, or delete still images. You can also exchange data with other equipment, such as a personal computer, using the "Memory Stick" reader/writer supplied with the camcorder or a PC card adapter for "Memory Stick" (not supplied).

File format (JPEG)

This camcorder records image data in JPEG format (with the .jpg extension).

Default image data name

100-0001: As displayed on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder of the camcorder. Dsc0001.jpg: As displayed on your PC screen.

Before using a "Memory Stick"

Before using a "Memory Stick"

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before using a "Memory Stick" - 1

  • You cannot record or erase still images when the write-protect tab on the "Memory Stick" is set to LOCK.
  • We recommend backing up important data.
  • Image data may be damaged in the following cases:
  • If you remove the "Memory Stick," turn the power off, or detach the battery for replacement when the access lamp is flashing.
  • If you use a "Memory Stick" near static electricity or magnetic fields.
  • It may be impossible to record or erase images if the write-protect switch on the "Memory Stick" is set to the LOCK position. -It is recommended to make a backup copy of important data. -Image data may be damaged in the following cases: -If you remove the "Memory Stick", turn off the power, or disconnect the battery pack for replacement while the access lamp is flashing. -If the "Memory Stick" is used near sources of static electricity or magnetic fields.

Using a "Memory Stick" - introduction

  • Prevent metallic objects or your finger from coming into contact with the metal parts of the connecting section.
  • Stick its label on the labeling position.
  • Do not bend, drop or apply strong shock to a "Memory Stick."
  • Do not disassemble or modify a "Memory Stick."
  • Do not let the "Memory Stick" get wet.
  • Do not use or keep a "Memory Stick" in locations that are:
  • Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the sun or under the scorching sun. -Under direct sunlight.
  • Very humid or subject to corrosive gases.
  • When you carry or store a "Memory Stick," put it in its case.

A "Memory Stick" formatted by a computer

A "Memory Stick" formatted by the Windows OS or Macintosh computers does not have a guaranteed compatibility with this camcorder.

Notes on image data compatibility

  • Image data files recorded on a "Memory Stick" by your camcorder conform to the Design Rules for Camera File Systems universal standard (DCF98 standard) established by the JEIDA (Japan Electronic Industry Development Association). You cannot play back on your camcorder still images recorded on other equipment (DCR-TRV890E/TRV900/TRV900E or DSC-D700/D770) that does not conform to this universal standard. (These models are not sold in some areas.)
  • If you cannot use a "Memory Stick" that is used with other equipment, format it with this camcorder (p. 158). However, formatting erases all information on the "Memory Stick."
  • Do not touch the metal parts of the connecting sections with metallic objects. Attach the label in the marking position.
  • Do not bend, drop, or strongly shake the "Memory Stick".
  • Do not disassemble or modify the "Memory Stick".
  • Do not allow water or moisture to get on the "Memory Stick". Do not use or store the "Memory Stick":

- In extremely hot places, for example, in a car parked in a sunny place, or under direct sunlight.

- In the sun. - In humid places or places exposed to corrosive gases.

  • When carrying or storing the "Memory Stick", put it in its case.

"Memory Stick" formatted by a computer

"Memory Stick" media formatted using computers with Windows or Macintosh operating systems are not guaranteed to be compatible with this camcorder.

We moisten the IO compatibility of the image data

Image files recorded by a video camera on a "Memory Stick" conform to the universal standard (DCF98) according to the file system design rules for video cameras established by the JEIDA (Japan Electronic Industry Development Association). This video camera cannot play back still images recorded on other equipment (DCR-TRV890E/TRV900/TRV900E or DSC-D700/D770) that does not conform to this universal standard. (These models are not sold in some areas.) - If you cannot use "Memory Stick" media that are used on other equipment, format them with this video camera (p. 164). However, formatting will delete all information on the "Memory Stick".

Using a "Memory Stick" - introduction

"Memory Stick" and are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

  • Windows is a registered trademark licensed to Microsoft Corporation, registered in the U.S.A. and other countries.
  • Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
  • All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, "TM" and "®" are not mentioned in each case in this manual.

Using a "Memory Stick" - introduction

"Memory Stick" is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

  • Windows is a registered trademark licensed to Microsoft Corporation, registered in the U.S.A. and other countries. Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. All other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. The symbols "TM" and "R" are not mentioned in each case in this manual.

Inserting a "Memory Stick"

Insert the "Memory Stick" with the Sony logo pointing toward the LCD panel and the triangle mark pointing inward.

Inserting a "Memory Stick"

Insert the "Memory Stick" with the Sony logo facing the LCD panel, and the arrow symbol pointing inward.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Inserting a "Memory Stick" - 1

Access lamp/

Handling precautions

To eject a "Memory Stick"

Push the "Memory Stick" inward, then release your finger. The "Memory Stick" comes out a little.

To eject a "Memory Stick"

Insert the "Memory Stick", then release it. The "Memory Stick" will pop out of the slot.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - To eject a "Memory Stick" - 1

Note

The "Memory Stick" may pop out depending on the way you push it.

When the access lamp is lit or flashing Never shake or strike your camcorder. Do not turn the power off, eject a "Memory Stick" or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image data breakdown may occur.

Note

"Memory Stick" may pop out of the slot, depending on how it is pressed.

When the access lamp is lit or flashing

Do not turn off the video camera or disconnect it. Do not remove the "Memory Stick" from the slot or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, the image data may be damaged.

If the "MEMORY STICK ERROR" indicator appears

The "Memory Stick" is broken or the file format is not proper. Eject the "Memory Stick," check it, and insert it again. If the same indicator appears, use another "Memory Stick."

Selecting the image quality mode

You can select the image quality mode in still picture recording. The default setting is SUPER FINE.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired setting, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select QUALITY, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image quality, then press the dial.

Image quality settings

SettingMeaning
SUPER FINEThis is the highest image quality in this camcorder. The number of still images you can record is fewer than FINE. The image is compressed to about 1/3.
FINEUse this mode when you want to record high quality images. The image is compressed to about 1/6.
STANDARDThis is the standard image quality. The image is compressed to about 1/10.

Note

In some cases, changing the image quality mode may not affect the image quality, depending on the types of images you are shooting.

Differences in image quality mode Recorded images are compressed in JPEG format before being stored in memory. The memory capacity allotted to each image varies depending on the image quality mode selected. Details are shown in the table below.

Image quality modeMemory capacity
SUPER FINEApprox. 190 KB
FINEApprox. 100 KB
STANDARDApprox. 60 KB

Note on the image quality mode indicator This is only displayed during recording.

Using a "Memory Stick" - Recording

Setting the image quality

The approximate number of images you can record on a "Memory Stick"

The approximate number of images you can record on a "Memory Stick" that is formatted using this camcorder varies depending on which image quality mode you select and the complexity of the subject.

The number of images that can be recorded on a "Memory Stick".

The approximate number of images that can be recorded on a "Memory Stick" formatted with this video camera varies depending on the selected image quality mode and the complexity of the subject.

Image quality mode/Pexim KaucesTBA u3o6paxeHn
SUPER FINEFINESTANDARD
4 MB type (supplied) / 4 M6 (ьхODIT B KOMПeKT)20 images/20 u3o6paxeHn40 images/40 u3o6paxeHn60 images/60 u3o6paxeHn
8 MB type (not supplied) / 8 M6 (ньхODIT B KOMПeKT)40 images/40 u3o6paxeHn81 images/81 u3o6paxeHn122 images/122 u3o6paxeHn
16 MB type (not supplied) / 16 M6 (ньхODIT B KOMПeKT)82 images/82 u3o6paxeHn164 images/164 u3o6paxeHn246 images/246 u3o6paxeHn
32 MB type (not supplied) / 32 M6 (ньхODIT B KOMПeKT)164 images/164 u3o6paxeHn329 images/329 u3o6paxeHn494 images/494 u3o6paxeHn
64 MB type (not supplied) / 64 M6 (ьхODIT B KOMПeKT)329 images/329 u3o6paxeHn659 images/659 u3o6paxeHn988 images/988 u3o6paxeHn

Recording still images on a "Memory Stick" - Memory Photo recording

You can record still images on a "Memory Stick."

Before operation

Insert a "Memory Stick" into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the desired still picture appears. The green ● mark stops flashing, then lights up. The brightness of the picture and focus are re-adjusted, being targeted for the middle of the picture and are fixed. Recording does not start yet. (3) Press PHOTO deeply. The shutter clicks and the image is frozen. The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on the "Memory Stick." Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.

Recording images on "Memory Stick" - recording photos in memory

You can record still images on a "Memory Stick".

Before operation

Insert a "Memory Stick" into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure the LOCK switch is set to the right position (unlocked). (2) Keep the PHOTO button lightly pressed until the desired still image appears. The green indicator ● will stop flashing and then light up. The brightness and focus of the image are adjusted and locked to the center of the image. Recording has not started yet. (3) Press the PHOTO button harder. The shutter clicks, and the image is captured. The image on the screen is recorded on the "Memory Stick". The recording will be complete when the indicator in the viewfinder disappears.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 2

[a] The number of images that can be recorded on the "Memory Stick" [b] The number of recorded images

[a] Number of images that can be recorded on a "Memory Stick" [b] Number of recorded images

Recording still images on a "Memory Stick" - Memory Photo recording

When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY The following functions do not work: wide TV mode, digital effect, picture effect, title, digital zoom, fader, shutter speed (1/25 or smaller) adjustment, and low lux mode and sports lesson mode in PROGRAM AE. (The indicator flashes in the low lux or sports lesson mode.)

Note

When you press the PHOTO button lightly at step 2, the focus of the image seems to be momentarily out.

While you are recording a still image You can neither turn off the power nor press PHOTO.

When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander

Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press the button.

Recording images continuously

You can record still images continuously. Select one of the two modes described below before recording.

Continuous mode [a]

You can record four still images continuously. The number of images is in accordance with remaining capacity of the "Memory Stick."

Multi screen mode [b]

You can record nine still images continuously on a single page.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Multi screen mode [b] - 1

Recording still images on a "Memory Stick" - Recording photographs in memory

If the POWER switch is set to MEMORY

The following functions do not work: wide-screen TV mode, digital effect, image effect, titles, digital transition, fader, shutter speed adjustment (1/25 or lower), low-light mode, and sports mode in PROGRAM AE. (The indicator flashes when shooting in low-light mode or sports mode.)

Note

If you lightly press the PHOTO button in step 2, a warning appears that focus is temporarily lost.

To cancel recording a still image, you can turn off the power or press the PHOTO button.

The message will be displayed on the screen immediately when you press the button.

Continuous recording of images

You can perform continuous recording of still images. Before recording, select one of the two modes described below.

Continuous mode [a]

You can perform continuous recording of up to four still images. The number of images depends on the free capacity of the "Memory Stick".

Multi-screen mode

You can record up to 9 still images continuously on one page.

[b]SONY DCR-VX2000E - Multi-screen mode - 1

Recording still images on a "Memory Stick" - Memory Photo recording

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTINUOUS, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired setting, then press the dial.

Recording images on "Memory Stick" - Recording photos in memory

(1) Set the POWER switch to the MEMORY position. Make sure the LOCK switch is set to the right position (unlocked). (2) Press the MENU button to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the setting, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the CONTINUOUS setting, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the setting, then press the dial.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Recording images on "Memory Stick" - Recording photos in memory - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Recording images on "Memory Stick" - Recording photos in memory - 2

Recording still images on a "Memory Stick" - Memory Photo recording

Continuous shooting settings

SettingMeaning (indicator on the screen)
OFFYour camcorder shoots one image at a time. (no indicator)
ONYour camcorder shoots up to four still images at about 0.5 sec intervals. (▲▲)
MULTI SCRNYour camcorder shoots nine still images at about 0.5 sec intervals and displays the images on a single page divided into nine boxes. (▲▲▲)

If the capacity of the "Memory Stick" becomes full

FULL" appears on the screen, and you cannot record still pictures on this "Memory Stick."

The number of images in continuous shooting

The number of images you can shoot continuously varies depending on the remaining capacity of the "Memory Stick." The shutter always clicks four times, however, the number of images recordable may be less than four.

Note on using a video flash light (not supplied)

The video flash light does not work in the continuous or multi screen mode if you install it to the intelligent accessory shoe.

Recording images on "Memory Stick" - recording photos in the camera

Setting the interval shooting

Recording still images on a "Memory Stick" - Memory Photo recording

Self-timer memory photo recording

You can make a memory photo recording with the self-timer. This mode is useful when you want to record yourself. You can also use the Remote Commander.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press (self-timer) in standby mode. The (self-timer) indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (3) Press PHOTO deeply. The self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep sound. In the last two seconds of the countdown, the beep sound gets faster, then recording starts automatically.

Recording to "Memory Stick" - recording photos to memory

Photo shooting with self-timer and saving to memory

You can take photos with the self-timer and save them to memory. This mode is useful when you want to take a picture of yourself. You can also use the Remote Commander for this.

(1) Set the POWER switch to the MEMORY position. Make sure the LOCK switch is set to the correct position (unlocked). (2) In standby mode, press the (SELF-TIMER) button. The SELF-TIMER indicator will appear on the LCD. (3) Press the PHOTO button firmly. The self-timer will start counting down from 10 with a beep sound. During the last two seconds of the countdown, the beep will sound faster, and then the recording will start automatically.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Photo shooting with self-timer and saving to memory - 1

To cancel self-timer recording

Press (self-timer) so that the indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen. You cannot cancel the self-timer recording using the Remote Commander.

Note

The self-timer recording mode is automatically cancelled when:

  • Self-timer recording is finished.
  • The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.

To cancel self-timer recording

Press the (self-timer) button so that the indicator disappears from the LCD screen or viewfinder. Self-timer recording cannot be cancelled using the Remote Commander.

Note

The self-timer recording mode will be automatically cancelled if: -Self-timer recording is finished. -The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.

Superimposing a still image in a "Memory Stick" on a moving picture - MEMORY MIX

You can superimpose a still image you have recorded on a "Memory Stick" on the top of the moving picture you are recording.

M. CHROM (Memory chromakey)

You can swap a blue area of a still image such as an illustration or a frame with a moving picture.

M. LUMI (Memory luminancekey)

You can swap a brighter area of a still image such as a handwritten illustration or title with a moving picture. Record a title on a "Memory Stick" before a trip or event for convenience.

C. CHROM (Camera chromakey)

You can superimpose a moving picture on a still image that is used as background. Shoot the subject against a blue background. The blue area of the moving picture will be swapped with a still image.

M. OVERLAP (Memory overlap)

You can make a moving picture fade in on top of a still image.

Overlay the "Memory Stick" image onto the background image - MEMORY MIX

A still image recorded on a "Memory Stick" can be superimposed on a moving picture being recorded.

M.CHROM (Chroma key button) You can replace the blue area of a still image, such as a picture or card, with a moving picture.

M. LUMI (Luminance key button) You can replace a brighter area of a still image, such as a picture made with chalk, or a title, with a moving picture. Before a trip or event, record a title on a "Memory Stick" for convenience.

C.CHROM (Camera chroma key button)

You can overlay an image onto a background image, which is used as a background. Shoot the object against a solid background. The solid part of the surface image will be replaced by the background image.

M. OVERLAP (Memory overlap)

Make the moving image gradually appear over the stationary image.

Superimposing a still image in a "Memory Stick" on a moving picture - MEMORY MIX

Imposition of a still image on a moving image - MEMORY MIX

M. CHROMStill image/ HelenobvnxHoe иЗобразженияMoving picture/ Посьхнoe иЗобразженияMoving picture + Still image/ Посьхнoe iЗобразжения + HelenobvnxHoe iЗобразжiones
Background: blue/ Фон: синий
M. LUMIStill image/ HelenobvnxHoe иЗобразженияMoving picture/ Посьхнoe иЗобразженияMoving picture + Still image/ Посьхнoe iЗобразжения + HelenobvnxHoe iЗобразжiones
HAPPY BIRTHDAYHAPPY BIRTHDAY
C. CHROMStill image/ HelenobvnxHoe иЗобразженияMoving picture/ Посьхнoe иЗобразжabellaMoving picture + Still image/ Посьхнoe iЗобразжabella + HelenobvnxHoe iЗобразжiones
Background: blue/ Фон: синий
M. OVERLAPStill image/ HelenobvnxHoe иЗобразжabellaMoving picture + Still image/ Посьхнoe иЗобразжabella + HelenobvnxHoe иЗобразжabellaMoving picture/ Посьхнoe иЗобразжiones

Superimposing a still image in a "Memory Stick" on a moving picture - MEMORY MIX

Before operation

Insert a recorded "Memory Stick" and a mini DV tape to be recorded into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA. (2) Press MEMORY MIX in standby mode. The last recorded or last composed image appears on the lower part of the screen as a thumbnail image. (3) Press MEMORY +/- or +/- on the Remote Commander to select the still image you want to superimpose. To see the previous image, press MEMORY - or - on the Remote Commander. To see the next image, press MEMORY + or + on the Remote Commander. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode. The mode changes as follows: M.CHROM ↔ M.LUMI ↔ C.CHROM ↔ M.OVERLAP (5) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The still image is superimposed on the moving picture, and your camcorder is in standby mode. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect. (7) Press START/STOP to start recording.

Haloxene HenobnXhoro I3O6paXeHnI 13 "Memory Stick" Ha noDbNxHoe I3O6paXeHne - MEMORY MIX

Before operation

Insert the "Memory Stick" into the recorder with the tape for recording.

(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA. (2) Press the MEMORY MIX button in the standby mode. The last recorded or composed image will appear at the bottom of the screen as a small image. (3) Press the MEMORY +/- button or the +/- button on the Remote Commander to select the desired image to be added. To view the previous image, press the MEMORY - button or the - button on the Remote Commander. To view the next image, press the MEMORY + button or the + button on the Remote Commander. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode. The mode will change in the following order: M. CHROM ↔ M. LUMI ↔ C. CHROM ↔ M. OVERLAP. (5) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The still image is superimposed on the moving image, and the camcorder enters the standby mode. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect. (7) Press the START/STOP button to start recording.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 1

Items to be adjusted

M. CHROMThe colour (blue) scheme of the area in the still picture which is to be swapped with a moving picture
M. LUMIThe colour (bright) scheme of the area in the still picture which is to be swapped with a moving picture
C. CHROMThe colour (blue) scheme of the area in the moving picture which is to be swapped with a still picture
M. OVERLAPNo adjustment necessary

As the bar is shorter, the effect is enhanced.

Items to be adjusted

M. CHROMLüBeTobAra rAmma (cInHЯ) o6nactn HeNoDVBxHOro I3O6paJxEHHa, KOTOpYU HUxHOr 3aMeHHTb I0DvBxHbIM I3O6paJxEHHeM
M. LUMILüBeTobAra rAmma (cBETnla) o6nactn HeNoDVBxHOro I3O6paJxEHHa, KOTOpYU HUxHOr 3aMeHHTb I0DvBxHbIM I3O6paJxEHHeM
C. CHROMLüBeTobAra rAmma (cInHЯ) o6nactn I0DvBxHOro I3O6paJxEHHa, KOTOpYU HUXHo 3aMeHHTb HeNoDVBxHbIM I3O6paJxEHHeM

M. OVERLAP: No adjustment is required. The shorter the bar, the stronger the effect.

Superimposing a still image in a "Memory Stick" on a moving picture - MEMORY MIX

To change the still image to be superimposed

Do either of the following:

  • Press MEMORY + / - after step 6.
  • Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial after step 6, and repeat the procedure from step 3 (except M. OVERLAP).

To change the mode setting

Press SEL/PUSH EXEC dial after step 6, and repeat the procedure from step 4 (except M. OVERLAP).

To cancel MEMORY MIX

Press MEMORY MIX.

During recording

You cannot change the mode setting.

The "Memory Stick" supplied with your camcorder has 20 images stored

-For M.CHROM:18 images (such as a frame) 100-0001 to 100-0018 - For C. CHROM: two images (such as background) 100-0019 to 100-0020

Sample images

Sample images stored in the "Memory Stick" supplied with your camcorder are protected (p. 202).

If a still image to be superimposed has lots of white areas

The thumbnail image may not be displayed clearly.

Image data modified with personal computers or shot with other equipment You may not be able to play them back with your camcorder.

Changing the still image stored on a "Memory Stick" to the still image - MEMORY MIX

To change the still image to be stored

Perform one of the following operations.

-Press the MEMORY+/- button after step 6. -Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial after step 6 and repeat the procedure from step 3 (except M. OVERLAP).

To change the setting of the mode, press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial after step 6 and repeat the procedure from step 4 (except M. OVERLAP).

To cancel the MEMORY MIX mode

Press the MEMORY MIX button.

During recording

The setting cannot be changed.

The "Memory Stick" supplied with the camcorder contains 20 images

may not be played back with this camcorder.

Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image

Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a mini DV tape and record it as a still image on a "Memory Stick." Your camcorder can also take in moving picture data through the input connector and record it as a still image on a "Memory Stick."

Before operation

Insert a recorded mini DV tape and a "Memory Stick" into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Press. The picture recorded on the mini DV tape is played back. (3) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the picture from the mini DV tape freezes. "CAPTURE" appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. Recording does not start yet. (4) Press PHOTO deeper. The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on a "Memory Stick." Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.

Image of the tape as a still image

The camcorder can read data from moving images recorded on a mini DV tape and record them as a still image on a "Memory Stick". The camcorder can also accept data from moving images via the input connector and record them as a still image on a "Memory Stick".

Before operation

Insert a recorded mini DV tape and a "Memory Stick" into the camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Press the ▷ button. Playback of the image recorded on the DV tape will begin. (3) While holding down the PHOTO button, wait until the image on the DV tape is "fixed". The "CAPTURE" indicator will appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. Recording has not yet started. (4) Press the PHOTO button firmly. The image on the screen will be recorded on the "Memory Stick". Recording will be completed when the indicator disappears from the screen.

3SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 2

CAPTURE 4SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 3

Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image

When the access lamp is lit or is flashing Never shake or strike the unit. Also, do not turn the power off, eject a "Memory Stick" or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image data breakdown may occur.

If "☑" appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder

The inserted "Memory Stick" is incompatible with your camcorder because its format does not conform to that of your camcorder. Check the format of the "Memory Stick."

If you press PHOTO lightly in the playback mode

The playback pauses momentarily.

Sound recorded on a mini DV tape

You cannot record the sound from a mini DV tape.

Titles that are already recorded on mini DV tapes

You cannot record the titles on a "Memory Stick."

When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander

Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press the button.

Recording images from a mini DV tape as still images

When the lamp is lit or flashing

Never touch the camcorder or press the RESET button. Also, do not turn off the power, remove the "Memory Stick" from the slot, or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, the image data may be damaged.

If the indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder

A "Memory Stick" that is not compatible with the camcorder is installed, because its format does not match the camcorder's format. Check the format of the "Memory Stick".

If you press the PHOTO button during playback

During playback, the pause is activated immediately.

Sound recorded on a mini DV tape

You cannot record sound on a mini DV tape.

Titles previously recorded on mini DV tapes

3Tn Tttpbl HeIb3aIncbIbTaHa "Memory Stick".

Ecnna Haxkab KhoNky PHOTO ha nyIbTe dncTaHcOnHOrO ynpaBHeHH

Bndeokamepa cpa3y je 3anuweT n3o6paXeHne, KOtOpoe 6yJeT Ha 3KpaHe B MOMeHT HaxKaTnKHOPIKn.

Recording a still image from other equipment

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder and set DISPLAY in ETC to LCD in the menu settings. (2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV on to see the desired program. The picture from the other equipment appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (3) Follow steps 3 and 4 on page 187.

When recording an image through the VIDEO jack

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on the video camera and the DISPLAY switch to LCD in the menu settings. (2) Start playback of the recorded tape or turn on the TV to watch the desired program. The image from the connected equipment will appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (3) Perform steps 3 and 4 on page 187.

Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder to the video output jack on the VCR or the TV.

Connect using an S video cable (not supplied) to obtain high-quality pictures

With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable.

Connect an S video cable (not supplied) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the VCR/TV.

This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.

Connect the connectors of the supplied audio/video cable to the video camera, and to the video input jack on the video monitor or television.

Connection using a video cable (not included) for obtaining high-quality images

It is not necessary to connect the device (video) to the TV to connect the audio/video cable.

Connect the video cable (not supplied) to the video input on the video camera and video monitor/TV.

This connection allows you to obtain high-quality DV format images.

Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image

When recording the image through the DV IN/OUT jack

Images with ribbons and DV as a still image

Recording an image through the DV IN/OUT jack

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Images with ribbons and DV as a still image - 1

Copying still images from a mini DV tape - Photo save

Using the search function, you can automatically take in only still images from mini DV tapes and record them on a "Memory Stick" in sequence.

Before operation

  • Insert a recorded mini DV tape into your camcorder and rewind the tape.
  • Insert a "Memory Stick" into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PHOTO SAVE, then press the dial. "PHOTO BUTTON" appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (5) Press PHOTO deeply. The still image from the mini DV tape is recorded on the "Memory Stick." The number of still images copied is displayed. "END" is displayed when copying is completed.

Copying still images from a mini DV tape - Saving to a Memory Stick

Using the camera functions, you can automatically take pictures of the lens or sequentially record them on a "Memory Stick".

Insert a recorded mini DV tape into the camcorder and rewind it to the beginning. Insert a "Memory Stick" into the camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Press the MENU button to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select SETUP, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PHOTO SAVE, then press the dial. The indication "PHOTO BUTTON" appears in the viewfinder or on the LCD screen. (5) Press the PHOTO button firmly. The still image is recorded onto the "Memory Stick". The number of copied still images is displayed. When copying is complete, the indication "END" appears.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Copying still images from a mini DV tape - Saving to a Memory Stick - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Copying still images from a mini DV tape - Saving to a Memory Stick - 2

Copying still images from a mini DV tape - Photo save

To cancel copying

Press MENU.

When the memory of the "Memory Stick" is full

"MEMORY FULL" appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, and the copying stops. Insert another "Memory Stick" and repeat the procedure from step 2.

When the access lamp is lit or flashing

Never shake or strike your camcorder. Also, do not turn the power off, eject the "Memory Stick" or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, the image data breakdown may occur.

To record all the images recorded on the mini DV tape

Rewind the tape all the way back and start copying.

If the write-protect tab on the "Memory Stick" is set to LOCK

"NOT READY" appears when you select the item in the menu settings.

When you change the "Memory Stick" in the middle of copying

Your camcorder resumes copying from the last image recorded on the previous "Memory Stick."

Copying still images with the DV interface – Saving in the camcorder's memory

To cancel copying

Press the MENU button.

If the "Memory Stick" becomes full

Never shake or strike the camcorder. Also, do not turn off the power, remove the "Memory Stick" from the slot, or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, the image data may be damaged.

Viewing a still picture – Memory Photo playback

You can play back still images recorded on a "Memory Stick." You can also play back six images at a time by selecting the index screen.

Before operation

Insert a "Memory Stick" into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded image is displayed. (3) Press MEMORY +/− or +/− on the Remote Commander to select the desired still image. To see the previous image, press MEMORY − or − on the Remote Commander. To see the next image, press MEMORY + or + on the Remote Commander.

Insert a "Memory Stick" into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to the VCR or MEMORY position. Make sure the LOCK switch is set to the right position (unlocked). (2) Press the MEMORY PLAY button. The last recorded image appears. (3) Press the MEMORY + / - button or the + / - button on the remote control to select the desired still image. To view the previous image, press the MEMORY - button or the - button on the remote control. To view the next image, press the MEMORY + button or the + button on the remote control.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 1

To stop memory photo playback, press MEMORY PLAY again.

To stop playback of still images from the memory

MEMORY PLAY

To play back recorded images on a TV screen

  • Connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder before operation.
  • When operating memory photo playback on a TV or on the LCD screen, the image quality may appear to have deteriorated. This is not a malfunction. The image data is as good as ever.
  • Turn the volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be output from the TV speakers.

When no images are recorded on the "Memory Stick"

The message "NO FILE" appears.

Image data modified with personal computers or shot with other equipment You may not be able to play them back with your camcorder.

Note on the date/time indicator

Recording date/time is not displayed,

however, it is automatically recorded on the

"Memory Stick." You can check the recording date/time while in memory playback mode by pressing DATA CODE.

Screen indicators during still image playback

For displaying recorded images on a TV screen

Total number of recorded images/

Image number/

Total number of recorded images

Print mark/

Print mark

Protect indicator/

Protect indicator

On data file name

  • When the hyphen is indicated between the directory and the file number, this data file name means that this file corresponds to the DCF98 standard.
  • When the underscore indicates that the file does not correspond to the DCF98 standard.
  • The directory is not indicated if the file structure in the "Memory Stick" does not correspond to the DCF98 standard.
  • The "Directory error" message may appear if the file structure in the "Memory Stick" does not correspond to the DCF98 standard. In this case, you cannot record on that "Memory Stick," however, you can play back images in the "Memory Stick."
  • When the data file name flashes, the file may be broken or the file format does not correspond to your camcorder.

Playing back six recorded images at a time (index screen)

You can play back six recorded images at a time. This function is especially useful when searching for a particular image.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press MEMORY INDEX to display the index screen.

Data file name

  • If there is a period between the directory name and the file number, this file name indicates that it conforms to the DCF98 standard.
  • If there is an underscore symbol between the directory name and the file number, this file name indicates that it does not conform to the DCF98 standard. The directory is not indicated if the file structure on the "Memory Stick" does not conform to the DCF98 standard.
  • If the file structure on the "Memory Stick" does not conform to the DCF98 standard, a message "DIRECTORY ERROR" may appear. In this case, recording on the "Memory Stick" is not possible, but you can play back images from the "Memory Stick". When the data file name is displayed, it is possible that the file is damaged or its format does not conform to this camcorder.

Simultaneous playback of six recorded images (index screen)

You can play back six recorded images simultaneously. This function is especially convenient when searching for individual images.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right position (unlocked). (2) Press the MEMORY INDEX button to display the index screen.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Simultaneous playback of six recorded images (index screen) - 1

Viewing a still picture - Memory Photo playback

A red ▶ mark appears above the image that is displayed before changing to the index screen mode.

MEMORY -: to display the previous six images

MEMORY +: to display the following six images

Viewing a still picture - Playback of photo images from memory

The device is turned on by pressing the power button, which is indicated by the LED indicator.

To return to the normal playback screen (single screen)

Press MEMORY + / - to move the ▶ mark to the image you want to display on full screen, then press MEMORY PLAY.

Files modified with personal computers may not be displayed on the index screen. Image files shot with other equipment may not be displayed on the index screen either.

Note

When displaying the index screen, a number appears above each image. This indicates the order in which images are recorded on the "Memory Stick." These numbers are different from the data file names.

[a]IMRAaIa [b]MeTka

To return to the normal playback screen (single screen)

Press the MEMORY +/– button to attach a mark to the image that you want to display on the playback screen, then press the MEMORY PLAY button.

Images may not be displayed on the index screen. Images captured with other equipment may also not be displayed on the index screen.

Note

Viewing the recorded images using a personal computer

The image data recorded with your camcorder is compressed in the JPEG format. If you use the application software, "PictureGear 4.1Lite" supplied with your camcorder, you can see images recorded on a "Memory Stick" on a computer screen. Use the Memory Stick Reader/Writer supplied with your camcorder or PC card adaptor for Memory Stick (not supplied) for this operation. For detailed instructions on operation, refer to the operating instructions of the Memory Stick Reader/Writer or PC card adaptor for Memory Stick and your application software. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your accessory.

  • Do not modify the directory of the file that corresponds to the DCF98 standard. The modified file will not be read.
  • If you use the new "Memory Stick," be sure to use it first with this camcorder.

Copying an image recorded on a "Memory Stick" to mini DV tapes

You can copy still images or titles recorded on a "Memory Stick" to a mini DV tape.

Before operation

Insert a mini DV tape for recording and a "Memory Stick" for playback into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Using the video control buttons, search for a point where you want to record the desired still image. Set the mini DV tape to playback pause mode. (3) Press REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder. The mini DV tape is set to the recording pause mode. (4) Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the still image you want to copy. (5) Press to start recording and press again to stop. (6) If you have more to copy, repeat steps 4 and 5.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 1

Copying an image recorded on a "Memory Stick" to mini DV tapes

To stop copying in the middle, press

During copying

  • You cannot operate the following buttons: MEMORY PLAY, MEMORY INDEX, MEMORY DELETE, MEMORY+, MEMORY-, and MEMORY MIX.
  • If you continue copying, do not use EDITSEARCH to search for the point where you want to record the desired still image. If you do, the playback image disappears from the screen.

Note on the index screen

You cannot record the index screen.

Image data modified with personal computers or shot with other equipment: You may not be able to copy them with your camcorder.

If you press DISPLAY in standby or recording mode

You can see memory playback and the file name indicators in addition to the indicators pertinent to mini DV tapes, such as the time code indicator.

Copying images recorded on a "Memory Stick" onto mini DV tapes

It may be impossible to copy them using a video camera.

Press the DISPLAY button to set the waiting time or recording.

In addition to the indicators pertaining to mini DV tapes, such as the time code indicator, you can see the indicators for playback from memory and the file name.

Playing back images continuously - SLIDE SHOW

You can automatically play back images in sequence. This function is useful especially when checking recorded images or during a presentation.

Before operation

Insert a "Memory Stick" into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired setting, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select SLIDE SHOW, then press the dial. (5) Press MEMORY PLAY. Your camcorder plays back the images recorded on the "Memory Stick" in sequence.

Continuous playback of images - SLIDE SHOW

It can automatically reproduce images in an intermittent sequence. This function is especially useful when checking recorded images during a presentation.

Before starting operation

Insert a "Memory Stick" into the camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the unlock position. (2) Press the MENU button to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the setting, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select SLIDE SHOW, then press the dial. (5) Press the MEMORY PLAY button. The camcorder plays back images recorded on a "Memory Stick" in a continuous sequence.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before starting operation - 1

Playing back images continuously - SLIDE SHOW

To stop or end the slide show, press MENU.

To pause during a slide show

Press MEMORY PLAY.

To start the slide show from a particular image

Select the desired image using the MEMORY +/− buttons before step 2.

To view the recorded images on TV

Connect your camcorder to a TV with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder before operation.

If you change the "Memory Stick" during operation

Be sure to follow the steps again from the beginning.

Continuous playback of images - SLIDE SHOW

To stop or terminate the demonstration of the image

Press the MENU button.

To pause during a slide show

MEMORY PLAY.

The image is displayed from a selected image.

Press the MEMORY +/- buttons to select the desired image.

To prevent accidental erasure of important images, you can protect selected images.

Before operation

Insert a "Memory Stick" into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Play back the image you want to protect (p. 193). (3) Press MENU to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PROTECT, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (7) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The "o-n" mark is displayed beside the data file name of the protected image.

To prevent accidental erasure - protection of images

To prevent accidental erasure of images, you can protect selected images.

Before operation

Insert a "Memory Stick" into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or BCR. Make sure the LOCK switch is set to the right position (unlocked). (2) Play back the image that needs to be protected (p. 193). (3) Press the MENU button to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the setting, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the PROTECT setting, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the ON setting, then press the dial. (7) Press the MENU button to turn off the menu. Under the name of the protected image, the "0-" mark appears.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 1

3,7

MENU

4

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 3

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 4

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 5

5

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 6

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 7

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 8

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 9

6

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 10

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 11

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 12

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 13

10/15□

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 14

Preventing accidental erasure - Image protection

To cancel image protection

Select OFF in step 6, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

Note

Formatting erases all information on the "Memory Stick," including the protected image data. Check the contents of the "Memory Stick" before formatting.

If the write-protect tab on the "Memory Stick" is set to LOCK

You cannot carry out image protection.

Prevention of accidental page - image protection

To cancel image protection

Select OFF in step 6, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

Note

Formatting will erase all data on the "Memory Stick", including data of recorded images. Before formatting, check the contents of the "Memory Stick".

Set the LOCK switch to the right (unlock) position to prevent accidental deletion of images on the "Memory Stick."

Deleting images will be impossible.

Deleting images

You can delete images stored in a "Memory Stick."

Deleting selected images

Before operation

Insert a "Memory Stick" into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Play back the image you want to delete (p. 193). (3) Press MEMORY DELETE. "DELETE?" appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (4) Press MEMORY DELETE again. The selected image is deleted.

Deleting images

Deleting selected images

Before operation

Insert a "Memory Stick" into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure the LOCK switch is in the forward position (unlocked). (2) Play back the image you want to delete (p. 193). (3) Press the MEMORY DELETE button. The "DELETE?" indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (4) Press the MEMORY DELETE button again. The selected image will be deleted.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Deleting selected images - 1

To cancel deleting an image

Press MEMORY - in step 4.

To delete an image displayed on the index screen

Press MEMORY + / - to move the mark to the desired image and follow steps 3 and 4.

To cancel deletion of an image

Press the MEMORY button - in step 4.

  • To delete a protected image, first cancel image protection.
  • Once you delete an image, you cannot restore it. Check the images to be deleted carefully before deleting them.

While "DELETING" appears

Do not turn the POWER switch or press any buttons.

If the write-protect tab on the "Memory Stick" is set to LOCK

You cannot delete any image.

Notes

Do not change the position of the POWER switch or press any buttons.

The write-protect switch on the "Memory Stick" is set to the LOCK position.

It will be impossible to delete any image.

Deleting all the images

You can delete all the unprotected images in a "Memory Stick."

Before operation

Insert a "Memory Stick" into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select DELETE ALL, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. "OK" changes to "EXECUTE." (6) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. "DELETING" appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. When all the unprotected images are deleted, "COMPLETE" is displayed.

The "Memory Stick" images shown above are not included.

Before operation

Insert a "Memory Stick" into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to the MEMORY position. Make sure the LOCK switch is set to the right position (unlocked). (2) Press the MENU button to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the setting, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the DELETE ALL setting, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the OK setting, then press the dial. The "OK" indication changes to "EXECUTE". (6) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The "DELETING" indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. When all unprotected images have been deleted, the "COMPLETE" indication appears.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 3

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 4

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Before operation - 5

To cancel deleting all the images in the "Memory Stick"

Select RETURN in step 5 or 6, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

To cancel deleting all images on the "Memory Stick"

Select RETURN in slot 5 or 6, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC button.

Writing a print mark - Print mark

You can specify the recorded still image to be printed out. This function is useful for printing out still images later.

Your camcorder conforms with the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standard for specifying the still images to print out.

Before operation

Insert a "Memory Stick" into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Play back the image to be printed out (p. 193). (3) Press MENU to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PRINT MARK, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (7) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The "mark" mark is displayed beside the data file name of an image.

Writing print marks - Print Mark

You can specify recorded still images for printing. This function is useful for subsequent printing of still images. This camcorder conforms to the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standard for printing still images.

Before operation

Insert a "Memory Stick" into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to the MEMORY position on the VCR. Make sure the LOCK switch is set to the correct position (unlocked). (2) Play back the image you want to print (p. 193). (3) Press the MENU button to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the setting, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the PRINT MARK setting, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the ON setting, then press the dial. (7) Press the MENU button to remove the menu display. Next to the file name of the image, a mark will appear.

Writing a print mark - Print mark

Writing print marks - Print Mark

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Writing print marks - Print Mark - 1

3.7

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Writing print marks - Print Mark - 2

4

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Writing print marks - Print Mark - 3

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Writing print marks - Print Mark - 1

5

MENU ENDSONY DCR-VX2000E - Writing print marks - Print Mark - 2

MEMORY SET 10/12

CONTINUOUS

QUALITY

PROTECT MARK

PROTECT SLIDE SHOW

CT DETAIL

  1. DELETE ALL

RETURN

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Writing print marks - Print Mark - 3

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Writing print marks - Print Mark - 4

MEMORY SET 10/12

CONTINUOUS

QUALITY

PRINT MARK ON PROTECT QEE

PROTECT QEE SLIDE SHOW

CT SHOW 1C, DELETE ALL

  1. FORMAT

RETURN

6

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Writing print marks - Print Mark - 5

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Writing print marks - Print Mark - 1

MEMORY SET

CONTINUOUS

QUALITY

PRINT MARK ON

PROTECT

SLIDE SHOW

EC DELETE ALL

FORMAT

RETURN

To cancel writing print marks

Select OFF in step 6, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

If the write-protect tab on the "Memory

"Stick" is set to LOCK

You cannot write print marks on still images.

To cancel the recording of print marks

Select OFF in step 6, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

If the cassette is protected against recording

"Memory Stick" is set to the LOCK position

You cannot write readable signs on fixed images.

Selecting cassette types

You can use the mini DV cassette only*. You cannot use any other 8 mm, Hi8, Digital8, VHS, VHSC, S-VHS, SVHS, S-VHSC, Betamax, ED Beta, ED Betamax, or DV cassette.

  • There are two types of mini DV cassettes: with cassette memory and without cassette memory. Tapes with cassette memory have the CIII (Cassette Memory) mark. Sony recommends that you use a tape with the CIII mark to enjoy your camcorder fully.

The IC memory is built into the cassette with cassette memory. Using this IC memory, your camcorder can read, write, and search data such as the date of recording or titles. The functions using the cassette memory require successive signals recorded on the tape. If the tape has a blank portion in the beginning or between the recorded portions, a title may not be displayed properly or the search functions may not work correctly.

To avoid making any blank portion on the tape, press END SEARCH to return to the end of the recorded portion before you begin the next recording when:

  • You have ejected the cassette while recording.
  • You have played back the tape in VCR mode. If there is a blank portion or discontinuous signal on your tape, re-record from the beginning to the end of the tape concerning the above.

When you record, using a digital video camera recorder without a cassette memory function, on a tape recorded by one with the cassette memory function, the same result may occur.

Selecting cassette types

Use only Mini DV cassettes. Do not use any other cassettes of 8 mm type, Hi8, Digital8, VHS, VHS-C, S-VHS, S-VHS-C, Betamax, ED Beta, or any other type.

* There are two types of Mini DV cassettes: with cassette memory and without cassette memory. Tapes with cassette memory have a mark (Cassette Memory). Sony Corporation recommends using tapes with the CII mark, as this is the most suitable type for this camcorder.

On this type of cassette, memory is installed in the integrated circuit of the video. The camcorder can read and write data, as well as record dates, recording stops, etc., on this integrated memory circuit. For functions that use cassette memory, it is necessary to record on the tape sequentially. If there is an unrecorded section at the beginning or between recorded sections, the title may be displayed incorrectly, or the index function may not work properly.

To prevent the appearance of unrecorded sections on the tape, press the END SEARCH button to return to the end of the recorded section before starting the next recording, if: - The cassette was removed during recording. - The tape was played back in VCR mode. If there is an unrecorded section or a pre-recorded signal on the tape, perform a re-recording from the beginning to the end, taking into account the above.

The same result may occur when recording with a camcorder without the cassette memory function on a tape that was recorded with the cassette memory function.

CII4K mark on the cassette: The memory capacity of tapes marked with CII4K is 4 Kb. Your camcorder can accommodate up to 16 Kb. 16 Kb tape is marked with CII16K.

The maximum number of data recordable on cassette memory (when using 4 Kb cassette memory)

DataNumbers
INDEX32 (15 bytes/one item of the data)
TITLE25
DATE6 (10 bytes/one item of the data)
PHOTO12 (10 bytes/one item of the data)
CASSETTE LABEL1

The numbers above are as a guide.

When you play back

When you connect your camcorder to any other video camera recorder to dub a tape that has recorded copyright control signals for copyright protection, you may not record the tape that played back on your camcorder.

When you record

You cannot record software on your camcorder that contains copyright control signals for copyright protection of software. "COPY INHIBIT" appears on the LCD screen, in the viewfinder or on the TV screen if you try to record such software.

Your camcorder does not record copyright control signals on the tape when it records.

Cassettes to be used

12-bit mode: The original sound can be recorded in stereo 1, and the new sound in stereo 2 at 32 kHz. The balance between stereo 1 and stereo 2 can be adjusted by selecting AUDIO MIX in the menu settings during playback. Both sounds can be played back. 16-bit mode: A new sound cannot be recorded but the original sound can be recorded in high quality. Moreover, it can also play back sound recorded at 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, the 16BIT indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

When you play back a dual sound track tape

When you play back a dual sound track tape recorded in a stereo system, set HiFi SOUND to the desired mode in the menu settings (p. 154).

Sound from speaker

HiFi SOUND modePlaying back a stereo tapePlaying back a dual sound track tape
STEREOStereoMain sound and sub sound
1Left soundMain sound
2Right soundSub sound

You cannot record dual sound programs on your camcorder.

12-bit mode: The original sound can be recorded on stereo channel 1, and the new sound can be recorded on stereo channel 2 in 32 kHz mode. The balance between stereo channel 1 and stereo channel 2 can be adjusted by selecting the AUDIO MIX setting in the menu settings during playback. Both channels can be played back. 16-bit mode: New sound cannot be recorded, but the original sound can be recorded in high quality. In addition, sound can be played back in 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz modes. When playing back recordings made in 16-bit mode, the 16BIT indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

When playing back a tape with dual sound tracks

To reproduce the tape with stereo sound recorded in a stereophonic system, set the HiFi SOUND command in the lower settings of the menu (p.154).

Sound through the loudspeaker

Be sure to affix a label only on the locations as illustrated below [a] so as not to cause malfunction of your camcorder.

Rewind the tape to the beginning, put the cassette in its case, and store it in an upright position.

If the cassette memory function does not work

Reinsert a cassette a few times. The gold-plated connector of mini DV cassettes may be dirty or dusty.

Cleaning the connector

If the gold-plated connector of mini DV cassettes is dirty or dusty, you may not be able to use the cassette memory function. Clean the gold-plated connector with a cotton-wool swab, about every 10 times you eject a cassette.

Using Cassettes

Your camcorder is equipped with the DV input/output connector based on the i.LINK (IEEE1394) standard.

This section explains the specifications and features of i.LINK.

i.LINK is a digital serial interface designed to integrate devices equipped with i.LINK connectors. By connecting i.LINK devices, i.LINK allows your device to:

  • Transmit and receive data such as digital audio and digital video signals in two ways
  • Control other i.LINK devices
  • Easily connect with another device using just an i.LINK cable.

Your i.LINK device is capable of connecting AV devices and performing various operations and data transfer. Further availability for connections with versatile equipment and operations will be planned in the future. Other advantages include the following feature: when connecting multiple i.LINK devices, your device can not only perform operations and data transfer with the directly connected device but also with any of the devices that are connected via other devices. Therefore, you will not need to worry about the order of connecting devices. However, depending on the features and specifications of the connected devices, you may need to operate certain functions differently or may not be able to perform certain operations or data transfer.

Note

Your camcorder can be connected to one device with the i.LINK cable (DV cable). When you connect with a device that has two or more i.LINK connectors, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the connected device.

Tips

  • i.LINK, a nickname for IEEE 1394 that Sony proposed, is a trademark supported by a majority of companies worldwide.
  • IEEE 1394 is an international standard defined by IEEE, The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.

The i.LINK connector is a digital input/output connector for DV, designed for i.LINK (IEEE1394) standard cables. This section explains the characteristics and functions of i.LINK.

i.LINK is a digital serial interface for connecting devices that have i.LINK connectors. By connecting i.LINK devices to each other, i.LINK allows these devices to:

- Transfer and receive data in both directions, such as digital audio and digital video signals. - Control other i.LINK devices. - Easily connect to other devices using only an i.LINK cable.

Your i.LINK device can be connected to AV devices and perform various data transfer operations. In the future, it is planned to further expand the possibilities of connection to various devices and functions.

Additional benefits are provided by the following functions.

By connecting multiple i.LINK devices, your device can perform specified operations and exchange data not only with the device to which it is directly connected, but also with all devices connected to it via that device. Therefore, you do not need to connect devices directly to each other.

However, depending on the set of functions and characteristics of the connected devices, the operation of individual functions may be controlled differently, and some operations for data transfer may be impossible.

Application

i.LINK defines a maximum data transfer speed of approximately 100, 200 and 400 Mbps* that are described as S100, S200 and S400 respectively.

For i.LINK devices, a maximum data transfer speed that the device supports is identified on "Specifications" page of the operating instructions supplied with the device or near its i.LINK connector.

With a device that does not identify the data transfer speed, the maximum data transfer speed that the device supports is S100.

When connecting with the device that support different data transfer speed, the actual data transfer speed may be different from those described on the i.LINK connectors.

*What is Mbps?

Mega bits per second. A measure of the rate at which data is transmitted per second. In case of 100 Mbps, 100 Mega bits of data can be transmitted per second.

For details on dubbing your camcorder to your VCR equipped with DV input/output connector, see page 106, 130.

Your camcorder is available for use with other devices equipped with Sony i.LINK (DV) connector (eg. VAIO personal computer series).

For details on connection with i.LINK cable and necessary software, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the connected device.

Use Sony i.LINK cables to connect the i.LINK devices.

4 pins <-> 4 pins (For dubbing)

i.LINK and are trademarks.

The i.LINK provides the following maximum data transfer rates: approximately 100, 200, and 400 Mbit/s, corresponding to S100, S200, and S400 respectively.

For devices with i.LINK, the maximum data transfer rate supported by the device is indicated in the "Specifications" section of the operating instructions supplied with the device. For devices whose data transfer rate is not indicated, the maximum value of this parameter is S100.

If you run into any problem using your camcorder, use the following table to troubleshoot the problem. If the problem persists, disconnect the power source and contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. If "C:□□:□□" appears on the LCD screen, display window or in the viewfinder, the self-diagnosis display function has worked. See page 222.

In the recording mode

SymptomCause and/or Corrective Actions
START/STOP does not operate.·The POWER switch is not set to CAMERA. → Set it to CAMERA. (p. 22) ·The tape has run out. → Rewind the tape or insert a new one. (p. 20, 42) ·The write-protect tab on the cassette is set to expose the red mark. → Use a new tape or slide the tab. (p. 20) ·The tape is stuck to the drum (moisture condensation). → Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least one hour to acclimate. (p. 234)
The power goes off.·While being operated in CAMERA mode, your camcorder has been in the standby mode for more than five minutes. → Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) and then to CAMERA again. (p. 24) ·The battery pack is dead or nearly dead. → Install a charged battery pack. (p. 13, 14)
The image on the viewfinder screen is not clear.·The viewfinder lens is not adjusted. → Adjust the viewfinder lens. (p. 28)
The SteadyShot function does not work.·STEADYSHOT is set to OFF in the menu settings. → Set it to ON. (p. 154)
The autofocusing function does not work.·The camcorder is in manual focus mode. → Turn to auto focus mode. (p. 81) ·Shooting conditions are not suitable for autofocus. → Adjust focus manually. (p. 81)
The fader function does not work.·The digital effect function is working. → Cancel it. (p. 54)
A vertical band appears when you shoot a subject such as lights or a candle flame against a dark background.·The contrast between the subject and background is too high. This is not a malfunction.
Vertical streaks appear when you shoot a very bright subject.·This is called the smear phenomenon. This is not a malfunction.
Some tiny white spots appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.·When the shutter speed is too low or the low lux mode is selected.
Unknown pictures or messages are displayed on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.·If 10 minutes elapse after you set the POWER switch to CAMERA or DEMO MODE is set to ON in the menu settings without a cassette inserted, your camcorder automatically starts the demonstration. →Insert a cassette. The demonstration stops. You can also cancel DEMO MODE. (p. 160)
The click of the shutter does not sound.·BEEP is set to OFF in the menu settings. →Set it to MELODY or NORMAL. (p. 154)
The image is not bright even if you use the video flash light.·The ND FILTER selector is set to 1 or 2. →Set it to OFF. (p. 66) ·The manual adjustment is not suitable for the situations. (The indicator flashes.) →Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK, or cancel the manual adjustment. (p. 61)

In the playback mode

SymptomCause and/or Corrective Actions
The tape does not move when a video control button is pressed.·The POWER switch is not set to VCR. →Set it to VCR. (p. 38)
The playback button does not function.·The tape has run out. →Rewind the tape. (p. 42)
There are horizontal lines on the picture or the playback picture is not clear or does not appear.·The video head may be dirty. →Clean the heads using the Sony DVM12CL cleaning cassette (not supplied). (p. 235)
No sound or only a low sound is heard when playing back a tape.·The volume is turned to minimum. →Turn up the volume. (p. 38) ·AUDIO MIX is set to the ST2 side in the menu settings. →Adjust AUDIO MIX. (p. 154)
The title search function does not work.·The tape has no cassette memory. →Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 95, 210) ·CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings. →Set it to ON. (p. 154) ·There is no title in the tape. →Superimpose the titles. (p. 141) ·The tape has a blank portion in the recorded portion. (p. 95)
SymptomCause and/or Corrective Actions
Displaying the recorded date, date search function does not work.·The tape has no cassette memory. →Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 97, 210) ·CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings. →Set it to ON. (p. 154) ·The tape has a blank portion in the recorded portion. (p. 98)
The new sound now being added, or that has been added to the recorded tape is not heard.·AUDIO MIX is set to ST1 side in the menu settings. →Set it to the side you want to monitor. (p. 154)
The title is not displayed.·TITLE DSPL is set to OFF in the menu settings. →Set it to ON. (p. 154)
The sound is muted or images do not appear when monitoring images through TV/VCR.→Pull out the A/V connecting cable from the AUDIO L/R and VIDEO jacks, then connect it again.

In the recording and playback modes

SymptomCause and/or Corrective Actions
The power does not turn on.·The battery pack is not installed, or is dead or nearly dead. → Install a charged battery pack. (p. 13, 14) ·The AC power adaptor is not connected to the mains. → Connect the AC power adaptor to the mains. (p. 18)
The end search function does not work.·The tape was ejected after recording when using a tape without cassette memory. (p. 36, 43) ·You have not recorded on the new cassette yet. (p. 36, 43)
The end search function does not work correctly.·The tape has a blank portion in the beginning or middle. (p. 37)
The picture does not appear in the viewfinder.·The LCD panel is open. → Close the LCD panel. (p. 25)
The battery pack is quickly discharged.·The operating temperature is too low. ·The battery pack is not fully charged. → Charge the battery pack fully. (p. 14) ·The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be recharged. → Replace with a new battery pack. (p. 13)
The battery remaining indicator does not indicate the correct time.·You have used the battery pack in an extremely hot or cold environment for a long time. ·The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be recharged. → Replace with a new battery pack. (p. 13) ·The battery is dead. → Use a full-charged battery pack. (p. 13, 14)
The cassette cannot be removed from the holder.· The power source is disconnected. → Connect it firmly. (p. 13, 18) · The battery is dead. → Use a charged battery pack. (p. 13, 14)
The ⊥ and ▲ indicators flash and no functions except for cassette ejection work.· Moisture condensation has occurred. → Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least one hour to acclimateze. (p. 234)
[√] indicator does not appear when using a tape with cassette memory.· The gold-plated connector of the tape is dirty or dusty. → Clean the gold-plated connector. (p. 213)
Remaining tape indicator is not displayed.· The [√] REMAIN is set to AUTO in the menu settings. → Set it to ON to always display the remaining tape indicator. (p. 154)

When operating using the "Memory Stick"

SymptomCause and/or Corrective Actions
Operations do not function.·The POWER switch is set to CAMERA or OFF (CHG). →Set it to MEMORY or VCR. ·The “Memory Stick” is not inserted. →Insert a “Memory Stick.” (p. 173)
Recording does not function.·The “Memory Stick” has already been recorded to its full capacity. →Erase unnecessary images and record again. (p. 177, 204) ·The “Memory Stick” formatted incorrectly is inserted. →Format the “Memory Stick” or use another “Memory Stick.” (p. 158) ·The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. →Set the tab to write. (p. 170)
The image cannot be deleted.·The image is protected. →Cancel image protection. (p. 202) ·The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. →Set the tab to write. (p. 170)
You cannot format the “Memory Stick.”·The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. →Set the tab to write. (p. 170)
Deleting all the images cannot be carried out.·The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. →Set the tab to write. (p. 170)
You cannot protect the image.·The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. →Set the tab to write. (p. 170) ·The image to be protected is not being played back. →Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image. (p. 193)
You cannot write a print mark on the still image.·The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. →Set the tab to write. (p. 170) ·The image that you will write a print mark is not being played back. →Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image. (p. 193)
SymptomCause and/or Corrective Actions
The photo save function does not work.·The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. →Set the tab to write. (p. 170) ·The battery pack is dead. →Install a charged battery pack or use the AC power adaptor instead of the battery pack. (p. 13, 18)

Others

SymptomCause and/or Corrective Actions
The title is not recorded.·The tape has no cassette memory. →Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 141, 210) ·The cassette memory is full. →Erase unnecessary title. (p. 145) ·The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure. →Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not visible. (p. 20) ·Nothing is recorded in that position on the tape. →Superimpose the title to the recorded position. (p. 141)
The cassette label is not recorded.·The tape has no cassette memory. →Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 149, 210) ·The cassette memory is full. →Erase some data. (p. 151) ·The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure. →Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not visible. (p. 20)
While editing using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), recording picture cannot be monitored.→Disconnect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), and connect it again. (p. 106)
Digital program editing does not function.·The input selector on the VCR is not set correctly. →Check the connection and set up the selector position. (p. 105) ·The camcorder is not connected to Sony DV equipment. →Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings and set the recording VCR to be controlled by infrared rays. ·Setting program on a blank portion of the tape is attempted. →Set the program again on a recorded portion. (p. 122) ·Your camcorder and the VCR are not synchronized. →Synchronize them. (p. 117)
The Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder does not work.·COMMANDER is set to OFF in the menu settings. → Set it to ON. (p. 154) ·Something is blocking the infrared rays. → Remove the obstacle. ·The batteries are inserted in the battery holder with the + − polarities incorrectly. → Insert the batteries with the correct polarity. (p. 253) ·The batteries are dead. → Insert new ones. (p. 253)
The input picture does not appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder when your camcorder is connected to outputs on the TV or VCR.·DISPLAY is set to V-OUT/LCD in the menu settings. → Set it to LCD. (p. 154)
The melody or beep sounds for five seconds.·Moisture condensation has occurred. → Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least one hour to acclimate. (p. 234) ·Some troubles have occurred in your camcorder. → Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your camcorder.
When charging the battery pack, no indicator appears or the indicator flashes on the display window.·The AC power adaptor is disconnected. → Connect it properly. ·The battery pack malfunctions. → Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.
You cannot charge the battery pack.·The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG). → Set it to OFF (CHG).
The camcorder is immediately turned off even if the amount of the battery remaining time is enough to operate.→ Charge the battery pack fully again. The correct remaining time is displayed.
No function works though the power is on.→ Disconnect the mains lead of the AC power adaptor or remove the battery, then reconnect it after about one minute. Turn the power on. If the functions still do not work, press the RESET button located at the lower-right of the ZEBRA selector using a sharp-pointed object. (If you press the RESET button, all the settings including the date and time return to the default.) (p. 18, 246)

Your camcorder has a self-diagnosis display function.

This function displays the current condition of your camcorder as a 5-digit code (a combination of a letter and figures) on the LCD screen, display window, or in the viewfinder. If a 5-digit code is displayed, check the following code chart. The last two digits (indicated by ) will differ depending on the state of your camcorder.

On the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, on the display window

SONY DCR-VX2000E - On the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, on the display window - 1

Self-diagnosis display

C:□□:□□

You can service your camcorder yourself.

E:□□:□□

Contact your Sony dealer or nearest local authorized Sony service facility.

Five-digit displayCause and/or Corrective Actions
C:04:□□• You are using a battery pack that is not an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack. → Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack. (p. 14)
C:21:□□• Moisture condensation has occurred. → Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least one hour to acclimateze. (p. 234)
C:22:□□• The video heads are dirty. → Clean the heads using the Sony DVM12CL cleaning cassette (not supplied). (p. 235)
C:31:□□• A malfunction other than the above.
C:32:□□• Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your camcorder. → Disconnect the mains lead of the AC power adaptor or remove the battery pack. After reconnecting the power source, operate your camcorder.
E:61:□□• A malfunction that you cannot service has occurred.
E:62:□□• Contact your Sony dealer and inform them of the 5-digit code. (example: E:61:10)

If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a few times, contact your Sony dealer or nearest local authorized Sony service facility.

Troubleshooting

If you have any problem with the camcorder, use the following table to fix it. If the problem persists, disconnect the power source and contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. If the indicator "C:□□:□□" appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, the self-diagnosis function has been activated. See page 229.

In recording mode

Self-diagnosis indicator

C:□□:□□ You can perform maintenance on the camcorder yourself. E:□□:□□

Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.

Пелейзуная ИndикадаВер�туная ручни и/и метор устраенья
C:04:□□• Бы Incрпьзуete батарейный 6лok, кOTOPь HeЯ ВДЛЕТСАбатарейный 6лokInfoLITHIUM"→ИсрпьзуITE сдддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддддд徳.
C:21:□□• ПОНЗОЛа КОДЕнCSAQUINBAлгИ.→ИЗВLEКИTE KACCETУ ANDSTABTe BVDeOKAMepy prINБЛЗИТЕНБИHAODINHac, пOKA He ICSnapITcR BnAra. (CTP. 14)
C:22:□□• 3aGrРЗнБИ BVDeOEROLOBKN.→ПОчИСТЕ ГLOВКИС POMOШь YI NCTAшь KACCETb SONY DVM12CL (HeBXODIT B KOMNJIeKT). (CTP. 235)
C:31:□□• НЕОДАКla, OTMЛЧАЯ OT priВЕDEнHBIX BVIshE.
C:32:□□• BByHbTe KACCETU bVCTABbTe eе ChOBA, a 3aTeM BKVIIQUHITe BaShyBVDeOKAMepy.→OTcoEДИнITE pROвОД ЗALEKTPoRITANHЯ CSEТБОGA aDAIТЕРа nepEMEHHOROTOKA ИЛСHIMITe BVDaPEHIVI BVDaK. ПОСLE NOВТOPHOrO NOДCoEДИHENHINCTOCHNIGA ПИТAHЯ BKVIIQUHITe BAshy BVDeOKAMepy.
E:61:□□• ПОНЗОЛа HENOLДАКla, KOTOPYЮ Bы He CMOЖeTe yCTpaHNTb
E:62:□□camocToTЯЛьно.→ОБразИТeСь в сервись的同时 РэТР Sony u coOБцInte Im 5-3нaчнь кOD.(нарprimер: E:61:10)

If you cannot fix the problem yourself even after trying the appropriate corrective measures several times, contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.

Warning indicators and messages

If indicators and messages appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, check the following:

See the page in parentheses (θ) for more information.

Warning indicators

The battery is dead or nearly dead. Slow flashing:

  • The battery is nearly dead.

Depending on conditions, the indicator may flash, even if there are five to 10 minutes remaining. If this flashes, we recommend that you charge the battery or install the charged battery.

Fast flashing:

The battery is dead (p. 14). The battery is completely dead.

Warning indicators and messages

Slow flashing:

  • The tape is near the end.
  • No tape is inserted (p. 20).*
  • The write-protect tab on the cassette is out (red) (p. 20).*

Fast flashing:

The tape has run out (p. 42).*

You need to eject the cassette

Slow flashing:

The write-protect tab on the cassette is out (red) (p. 20). Fast flashing: - Moisture condensation has occurred (p. 234). The tape has run out (p. 42). - The self-diagnosis display function is activated (p. 222).

Moisture condensation has occurred* Fast flashing:

  • Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder, and leave it for about one hour with the cassette compartment open (p. 234).

Warning indicators and messages

If indicators and messages appear on the screen or in the viewfinder, check the following:

Below are the warning indicators. On the page, in parentheses “()”

Warning indicators

Warning indicators and messages

Warning indicator as to cassette memory

Slow flashing:

  • No tape with cassette memory is inserted (p. 210).*

Self-diagnosis display (p. 222)

The still image is protected. Slow flashing: - The still image is protected (p. 202). Warning indicator as to "Memory Stick" Slow flashing: - No "Memory Stick" is inserted (p. 173). Fast flashing: - Unreadable "Memory Stick" is inserted.

100-0001 " (Warning indicators) Memory Stick" file error*

Slow flashing:

  • File is broken.
  • File has no compatibility.

"Memory Stick" format error* Fast flashing:

  • There are two directories or more. Data is broken. "Memory Stick" is not formatted correctly (p. 158).

Warning messages

  • CLOCK SET Reset the date and time (p. 168). FOR "InfoLITHIUM" BATTERY ONLY Use an "InfoLITHIUM" battery pack (p. 14).
  • MEMORY FULL The "Memory Stick" is full in photo save function (p. 192). CLEANING CASSETTE The video heads are dirty (p. 235).* FULL The tape cassette memory is full (p. 144).

Warning indicators and messages

Warning indicator for cassette with memory

Slow flashing:

  • No tape with cassette memory is inserted (p. 210).*

Self-diagnosis display (p. 229)

Image protected

Slow flashing:

  • No "Memory Stick" is inserted (p. 173).

Fast flashing:

  • An incompatible "Memory Stick" is inserted.

AUDIO MODE is set to 16BIT.* You cannot dub new sound (p. 159).

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Warning indicators and messages - 1

REC MODE

REC MODE is set to LP.* You cannot dub new sound (p. 159).

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Warning indicators and messages - 2

TAPE

There is no recorded portion on the tape.* You cannot dub new sound (p. 138).

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Warning indicators and messages - 3

“i.LINK” CABLE

i.LINK cable is connected (p. 139).* You cannot dub new sound.

FULL

The "Memory Stick" is full (p. 180).*

The write-protect tab on the "Memory Stick" is set to LOCK (p. 170).*

NOFILE

No still image is recorded on the "Memory Stick" (p. 194).*

NO MEMORY STICK

No "Memory Stick" is inserted (p. 173).*

  • MEMORY STICK ERROR

The "Memory Stick" data is corrupted (p. 173).*

FORMAT ERROR (p. 158)*

  • DIRECTIONAL ERROR (p. 195)*
  • COPY INHIBIT

The tape contains copyright control signals for copyright protection of software (p. 211).*

The tape has reached the end of the tape (p. 42).*

  • NO TAPE

Insert a cassette tape (p. 20).*

  • You hear the melody or beep sound. ** and the message appear alternately.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Warning indicators and messages - 1

16BIT

AUDIO MODE is set to 16BIT.* New sound cannot be recorded (p. 165).

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Warning indicators and messages - 2

REC MODE is set to LP.* New sound cannot be recorded (p. 165).

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Warning indicators and messages - 3

TAPE: There is no recorded section on the tape.* New sound cannot be recorded (p. 138).

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Warning indicators and messages - 4

"i.LINK" CABLE: An i.LINK cable is connected (p. 139).* New sound cannot be recorded.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Warning indicators and messages - 5

ULL "Memory Stick" has been inserted (p. 180).*

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Warning indicators and messages - 6

Remove the tape from the "Memory Stick" and set it to the LOCK position (p. 170).*

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Warning indicators and messages - 7

There are no recorded images on the "Memory Stick" (p. 194).*

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Warning indicators and messages - 8

The "Memory Stick" is not inserted (p. 173).*

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Warning indicators and messages - 9

FORMAT ERROR (p. 164)*

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Warning indicators and messages - 10

DIRECTIONAL ERROR (p. 195)*

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Warning indicators and messages - 11

COPY INHIBIT: On the tape, control signals for copyright protection are recorded to protect copyrights on software (p. 211).*

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Warning indicators and messages - 12

Using your camcorder abroad

Using your camcorder abroad

You can use your camcorder in any country or area with the AC power adaptor supplied with your camcorder within 100V to 240V AC, 50/60 Hz.

Your camcorder is a PAL system based camcorder. If you want to view the playback picture on a TV, it must be a PAL system based TV with the AUDIO/VIDEO input jack. The following shows TV colour systems used overseas.

PAL system

Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany, Great Britain, Holland, Hong Kong, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, etc.

PAL-M system

Brazil

PAL-N system

Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay

NTSC system

Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Jamaica, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A., Venezuela, etc.

SECAM system

Bulgaria, France, Guyana, Hungary, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Poland, Russia, Ukraine, etc.

Simple setting of clock by time difference

You can easily set the clock to the local time by setting a time difference. Select WORLD TIME in the menu settings. See page 154 for more information.

Maintenance information and precautions

Moisture condensation

If your camcorder is brought directly from a cold place to a warm place, moisture may condense inside your camcorder, on the surface of the tape, or on the lens. In this condition, the tape may stick to the head drum and be damaged or your camcorder may not operate correctly. If there is moisture inside your camcorder, the beep sounds and the indicator flashes. When the indicator flashes at the same time, the cassette is inserted in your camcorder. If moisture condenses on the lens, the indicator will not appear.

If moisture condensation occurred

None of the functions except cassette ejection will work. Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder, and leave it for about one hour with the cassette compartment open. Your camcorder can be used again if the indicator does not appear when the power is turned on again.

Note on moisture condensation

Moisture may condense when you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place (or vice versa) or when you use your camcorder in a hot place as follows:

  • You bring your camcorder from a ski slope into a place warmed up by a heating device.
  • You bring your camcorder from an air-conditioned car or room into a hot place outside.
  • You use your camcorder after a squall or a shower.
  • You use your camcorder in a high temperature and humidity place.

How to prevent moisture condensation

When you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place, put your camcorder in a plastic bag and tightly seal it. Remove the bag when the air temperature inside the plastic bag has reached the surrounding temperature (after about one hour).

Information on care of the apparatus and safety precautions

Moisture condensation

If the camcorder is brought from a cold place into a warm room, moisture may condense inside the camcorder, on the surface of the tape, or on the lens. In such a state, the tape may stick to the drum and be damaged, or the camcorder may not operate properly. If moisture condensation occurs inside the camcorder, a beep sounds and the indicator E lights up. If indicator A lights up at the same time, it means that a cassette is inserted in the camcorder. If moisture has condensed on the lens, the indicator may not appear.

If moisture condensation occurs

Except for ejecting the cassette, no function will work. Eject the cassette, turn off the camcorder, and leave it for about one hour with the cassette compartment open. The camcorder can be used again if the indicator does not appear when the power is turned on again.

Notes on moisture condensation

Moisture may form if the camcorder is moved from a cold place to a warm place (or vice versa) or when the camcorder is used in a hot place in the following situations:

  • If the camcorder is brought from a snowy slope into a room where a heater is operating.
  • If the camcorder is brought from an air-conditioned car or room into a hot place.
  • If the camcorder is used after a squall or a shower.
  • Do not use the video camera in places with high humidity.

How to prevent condensation

If the video camera is brought from a cold place to a warm place, put the video camera in a plastic bag and seal it tightly. Remove the video camera from the plastic bag when the air temperature inside the bag reaches the ambient temperature (approximately one hour).

Maintenance information and precautions

Removing Dust from Inside the Viewfinder

Before cleaning, remove the sticker below the viewfinder lens adjustment lever.

(1) While holding down the hook ①, slide the eyecup in the direction of the arrow and remove it out ②. (2) Clean the surface with a commercially available blower.

Information on device care and safety precautions

Sealing from the inside of the actuator

(1) Hook the shackle ①, pull the pin in the direction of the arrow and remove it ②. (2) Clean the surface using a commercially available air blower.

1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Sealing from the inside of the actuator - 1

2

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Sealing from the inside of the actuator - 2

To reattach the eyecup

Do step 1 above sliding the eyecup in the reverse direction of the arrow.

Maintenance information

Cleaning the video head

To ensure normal recording and clear pictures, clean the video heads. The video head may be dirty when:

  • mosaic-pattern noise appears on the playback picture.
  • playback pictures do not move.
  • playback pictures do not appear.
  • the × indicator and “CLEANING CASSETTE” message appear one after another on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

Maintenance information and precautions

If the above problem, [a] or [b] occurs, clean the video heads for 10 seconds with the Sony DVM12CL cleaning cassette (not supplied).

Check the picture and if the above problem persists, repeat cleaning.

Device maintenance standards and safety precautions

If the above problem, [a] or [b] occurs, clean the video heads for 10 seconds with the Sony DVM12CL cleaning cassette (not supplied). Check the picture and if the above problem persists, repeat cleaning.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Device maintenance standards and safety precautions - 1

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Device maintenance standards and safety precautions - 2

[a] or/ nnnSONY DCR-VX2000E - Device maintenance standards and safety precautions - 3

[b]SONY DCR-VX2000E - Device maintenance standards and safety precautions - 4

Cleaning the LCD screen

If fingerprints or dust make the LCD screen dirty, we recommend using an LCD cleaning cloth (not supplied) to clean the LCD screen.

Charging the vanadium-lithium battery in your camcorder

Your camcorder is supplied with a vanadium-lithium battery installed so as to retain the date and time, etc., regardless of the setting of the POWER switch. The vanadium-lithium battery is always charged as long as you are using your camcorder. The battery, however, will get discharged gradually if you do not use your camcorder. It will be completely discharged in about four months if you do not use your camcorder at all. Even if the vanadium-lithium battery is not charged, it will not affect the camcorder operation. To retain the date and time, etc., charge the battery if the battery is discharged.

Charging the vanadium-lithium battery:

  • Connect your camcorder to mains using the AC power adaptor supplied with your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the POWER switch turned off for more than 24 hours.
  • Or install the fully charged battery pack in your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the POWER switch turned off for more than 24 hours.

Cleaning the LCD screen

To clean the screen, it is recommended to use a special cloth (not included in the kit).

Battery of vanadium-lithium batteries in the form of video cameras

A backup battery is installed in the video camera, which preserves the date and time in memory regardless of the POWER switch setting. The backup battery is always charged while you use your video camera. However, the battery will gradually discharge if you do not use the video camera. If the video camera is not used at all, the battery will completely discharge in approximately 4 months. Even if the backup battery is not charged, this does not affect the operation of the video camera. To preserve the date and time in memory, charge the battery if it is discharged.

Charging the vanadium-lithium battery

Maintenance information and precautions

Precautions

Camcorder operation

  • Operate your camcorder on 7.2V (battery pack) or 8.4V (AC power adaptor).
  • For DC or AC operation, use the accessories recommended in this operating instructions.
  • If any solid object or liquid get inside the casing, unplug your camcorder and have it checked by a Sony dealer before operating it any further.
  • Avoid rough handling or mechanical shock. Be particularly careful of the lens.
  • Keep the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) when you are not using your camcorder.
  • Do not wrap your camcorder with a towel, for example, and operate it. Doing so might cause heat to build up inside.
  • Keep your camcorder away from strong magnetic fields or mechanical vibration. Noise may appear on the image.
  • Do not touch the LCD screen with a sharp-pointed object.
  • If your camcorder is used in a cold place, a residual image may appear on the LCD screen. This is not a malfunction.
  • While using your camcorder, the back of the LCD screen may heat up. This is not a malfunction.

On handling tapes

  • Do not insert anything into the small holes on the rear of the cassette. These holes are used to sense the type and thickness of the tape and if the recording tab is in or out.
  • Do not open the tape protect cover or touch the tape.
  • Avoid touching or damaging the terminals. To remove dust, clean the terminals with a soft cloth.
  • Operate the video camera from 7.2 V (batteries) or 8.4 V (AC power adaptor).
  • Regarding the operation of the video camera from DC or AC power, use the accessories recommended in this instruction manual for operation.
  • If any solid object or liquid gets inside the housing, turn off the video camera and before further use, have it checked by a Sony dealer. Do not subject the video camera to rough handling or mechanical shocks. Be especially careful with the lens. When the video camera is not in use, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). Do not wrap the video camera, for example in a cloth, or operate it in such a state. This may cause the temperature inside the video camera to rise. Keep the video camera away from strong magnetic fields and do not subject it to mechanical shock. Interference may appear on the image.
  • Do not touch the LCD screen with sharp objects. When using your video camera in a cold place, a residual image may appear on the LCD screen. However, this is not a malfunction. When the LCD screen is used for a long time, the back of the LCD screen may become warm. However, this is not a malfunction.

Regarding the handling of tapes

Do not insert any objects into the small holes on the back of the cassette. These holes are used to detect the type and thickness of the tape, and also to detect whether the record protection tab is present or absent. Do not open the tape protection cover or touch the tape. Do not touch the tape surface and do not allow it to be damaged. If the tape surface is dirty, clean it with a soft cloth.

Camcorder care

  • Remove the tape, and periodically turn on the power, operate the CAMERA and VCR sections and play back a tape for about three minutes when your camcorder is not to be used for a long time.
  • Clean the lens with a soft brush to remove dust. If there are fingerprints on the lens, remove them with a soft cloth.
  • Clean the camcorder body with a dry soft cloth, or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of solvent which may damage the finish.
  • Do not let sand get into your camcorder. When you use your camcorder on a sandy beach or in a dusty place, protect it from the sand or dust. Sand or dust may cause your camcorder to malfunction, and sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired.

AC power adaptor

  • Unplug the unit from the mains when you are not using the unit for a long time. To disconnect the mains lead, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the mains lead itself.
  • Do not operate the unit with a damaged cord or if the unit has been dropped or damaged.
  • Do not bend the mains lead forcibly, or place a heavy object on it. This will damage the lead and may cause fire or electrical shock.
  • Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the connecting section. If this happens, a short may occur and the unit may be damaged.
  • Always keep metal contacts clean.
  • Do not disassemble the unit.
  • Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the unit.

Maintenance information and precautions

  • While the unit is in use, particularly during charging, keep it away from AM receivers and video equipment. AM receivers and video equipment disturb AM reception and video operation.
  • The unit becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.
  • Do not place the unit in locations that are: - Extremely hot or cold
  • Dusty or dirty
  • Very humid Vibrating

Battery pack

  • Use only the specified charger or video equipment with the charging function.
  • To prevent accident from a short circuit, do not allow metal objects to come into contact with the battery terminals.
  • Keep the battery pack away from fire.
  • Never expose the battery pack to temperatures above 60°C (140°F), such as in a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight.
  • Keep the battery pack dry.
  • Do not expose the battery pack to any mechanical shock.
  • Do not disassemble nor modify the battery pack.
  • Attach the battery pack to video equipment securely.
  • Charging while some capacity remains does not affect the original battery capacity.
  • The battery pack is not resistant to water. Do not wet the battery pack.
  • Unless you use the battery pack for a long period, store the battery pack after you charge it fully and use it completely once a year.
  • Store the battery pack in a cool, dry place.

Information on care of the apparatus and precautions

- When using the apparatus, especially during charging, keep it away from the receivers of radio broadcasts and video equipment. The receivers of radio broadcasts and video equipment may interfere with the normal operation of the video equipment. During operation, the apparatus heats up. However, this is not a malfunction. - Do not place the apparatus in places:

  • Excessively hot or cold - Dusty or humid - Very humid - Subject to vibration

Battery pack

Use only the recommended charging device for the video apparatus with the supplied adapter. - To prevent accidents due to short-circuiting, do not allow metal objects to come into contact with the terminals of the battery pack. - Do not throw the battery pack into fire. - Do not expose the battery pack to temperatures above 60°C, and do not leave it in a car parked in a sunny place or under direct sunlight. - Keep the battery pack dry. - Do not expose the battery pack to any mechanical shocks. - Do not disassemble or modify the battery pack. - Attach the battery pack securely to the video apparatus. Charging while some capacity remains does not affect the original battery capacity. The battery pack is not waterproof. Do not expose the battery pack to water. - If you do not use the battery pack for a long period, charge it fully and store it separately. The battery pack should be fully discharged once a year. Store the battery pack in a cool, dry place.

Notes on dry batteries

To avoid possible damage from battery leakage or corrosion, observe the following:

  • Be sure to insert the batteries with the + - polarities matched to the + - marks.
  • Dry batteries are not rechargeable.
  • Do not use a combination of new and old batteries.
  • Do not use different types of batteries.
  • Current flows from batteries when you are not using them for a long time.
  • Do not use leaking batteries.

If batteries are leaking

  • Wipe off the liquid in the battery compartment carefully before replacing the batteries.
  • If you touch the liquid, wash it off with water.
  • If the liquid get into your eyes, wash your eyes with a lot of water and then consult a doctor.

If any problem occurs, unplug your camcorder and contact your nearest Sony dealer.

- When installing batteries, observe the correct polarity, in accordance with the markings. - Do not recharge dry batteries. - Do not use new batteries together with old ones. - Do not use batteries of different types. - If batteries are used for a long time, they gradually discharge. Do not use batteries that have leaked.

If leakage of the internal substance of the batteries occurs

- Before replacing the batteries, carefully wipe off any remaining liquid from the battery compartment. If liquid comes into contact with skin, rinse it off with water. If liquid gets into the eyes, rinse the eyes with plenty of water, then consult a doctor.

If any problems occur, disconnect the camcorder from the power source and contact the nearest Sony service center.

Video camera recorder

System

Video recording system

2 rotary heads

Helical scanning system

Audio recording system

Rotary heads, PCM system

Quantization: 12 bits (Fs 32kHz stereo 1, stereo 2), 16 bits

(Fs48 kHz, stereo)

Video signal

PAL colour, CCIR standards

Usable cassette

Mini DV cassette with the Mini DV

mark printed

Tape speed

SP: Approx. 18.81 mm/s

LP: Approx. 12.56 mm/s

Recording/playback time (using cassette DVM60)

SP: 1 h

LP: 1.5 h

Fast-forward/rewind time (using cassette DVM60)

Approx. 2 min and 30 s

Viewfinder

Electric viewfinder (colour)

Image device

1/3 type CCD (3 Charge Coupled

Device)

Approx. 450,000 pixels

(Effective: Approx. 400,000 pixels) Lens

Combined power zoom lens

Filter diameter: 58 mm (2 3/8 in)

12x (Optical), 48x (Digital)

F1.6-2.4

Focal length

6-72 mm (1/4 - 2 7/8 in)

When converted to a 35 mm still camera

43.2 - 518.4 mm (1 3/4 - 20 1/2 in)

Colour temperature

Auto, Indoor (3200K),

Outdoor (5800K),

Minimum illumination

2 lux (F1.6)

Input/Output connectors

S video input/output

Input/output auto switch

4-pin mini DIN

Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p

75 ohms, unbalanced

Chrominance signal: 0.3 Vp-p

75 ohms, unbalanced

Video input/output

Input/output auto switch

RCA pin-jack, 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms,

unbalanced, sync negative

Audio input/output

Input/output auto switch

RCA pin-jack, 327 mV (at output

impedance more than 47 kilohms)

Output impedance with less than

2.2 kilohms

Input impedance more than

47 kilohms

Headphones jack

Stereo minijack (Ø 3.5 mm)

LANC control jack

Stereo mini-minijack (Ø 2.5 mm)

MIC jack

Minijack, 0.388 mV low imped

ance with 2.5 to 3.0 VDC output

impedance 6.8 kilohms (Ø 3.5 mm)

Stereo type

DV input/output

4-pin connector

Speaker

Dynamic speaker (20 mm diameter)

LCD screen

Picture

2.5 type measured diagonally

49.9 × 37.3 mm (2 × 1 1/2 in)

Total dot number

200640 (880×228)

General

Power requirements

7.2 V (battery pack)

8.4 V (AC power adaptor)

Average power consumption

(when using the battery pack)

During camera recording using

LCD

4.1 W

Viewfinder

4.0 W

Operating temperature

0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)

Storage temperature

-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)

Dimensions (approx.)

115 × 146 × 342 mm (4 5/8 × 5 3/4

× 13 1/2 in) (w/h/d)

Mass (approx.)

1.4 kg (3 lb 1 oz)

main unit only

1.6 kg (3 lb 8 oz)

including the battery pack,

NP-F330, cassette DVM60 and

hood cap

Supplied accessories

See page 5.

AC power adaptor

Power requirements

100 - 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption

23 W

Output voltage

DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A in the

operating mode

Operating temperature

0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)

Storage temperature

-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)

Dimensions (approx.)

125 × 39 × 62 mm

(5 × 19/16 × 21/2 in) (w/h/d)

excluding projecting parts

Mass (approx.)

280 g (9.8 oz)

excluding power cord

Cord length (approx.)

Mains lead: 2 m (6.6 feet)

Connecting cord: 1.6 m (5.2 feet)

Battery pack

Output voltage

DC 7.2 V

Capacity

5.0 Wh

Dimensions (approx.)

38.4 × 20.6 × 70.8 mm (19/16 ×

13/16 × 27/8 in) (w/h/d)

Mass (approx.)

70 g (2.5 oz)

Type

Lithium ion

"Memory Stick"

Memory

Flash memory

4 MB: MSA-4A

Operating voltage

2.7 V - 3.6 V

Power consumption

Approx. 45 mA in the operating mode

Approx. 130 µA in the standby mode

Dimensions (approx.)

50 × 2.8 × 21.5 mm

(2 × 1/8 × 7/8 in) (w/h/d)

Mass (approx.)

4 g (0.14 oz)

Design and specifications are

subject to change without notice.

Technical characteristics

Videocamera

System

System of video recording

2B playback devices

System of inclined

Mechanical scanning

Audio recording system

Rotating heads, system INKM

Discretization: 126nt (cdBn

channels 32 KΓ, stereo 1, stereo

2), 16 bits

(cdBn frequency 48 KΓ, stereo)

Video signal

Color signal, standard MKKP

Used cassettes

Cassettes with DV recording

Mark MinD

Tape speed

SP: approx. 18.81 mm/s

LP: approx. 12.56 mm/s

Playback time

Playback (when using

DVM60 cassette)

SP: 14

LP: 1.54

Fast forward/rewind time

Fast forward/rewind (when

using DVM60 cassette)

approx. 2 min. 30 sec.

Viewfinder

3NeKtpnueckn BUnOnCKaTeIb

(LIBETHOJ)

ΦopMnpoBaTeIb n306paXeHnA

π3C Tnna 1/3 (3 npnbopa c

3apAIOBOCB83bO)

Pn6J.450 000 toeK

(Pa6oyné: npn6n. 400 000 toye)

06beKTHB

YHnBepcaJIbHbI OObEeKTHB C

3NEKTPONPNUBODOM

TpaHcΦokaTopa

Dnametp cnjltpa 58 MM

12× (ontnueckn), 48×

(LIDPPOBOI)

F1.6 - 2.4

6-72MM

Ppi npeo6pa3ObaHnB 35-MM

ΦoTOKaMepy

43.2 - 518.4 mm

White balance

Auto, indoor (3,200 K),

outdoor (5,800 K),

Minimum illumination

2 lux (F1.6)

Separate input/

output signals

Video input/output

Automatic input/output switcher

Signal strength: 1 V peak-to-peak,

75 Ohm, unbalanced

Signal strength: 0.3 V peak-to-peak,

75 Ohm, unbalanced

Video input/output

Automatic input/output switcher

RCA connector, signal amplitude 1

V peak-to-peak, 75 Ohm

unbalanced,

synchronized

negative polarity

Audio input/output

Automatic switcher

input/output

RCA jack, 327 mV (at full

output impedance greater than

47 kΩ)

Full output

impedance - less than 2.2 kΩ

Nominal input impedance -

greater than

47 kΩ

Jack for headphones

Stereo phone jack

Stereo mini jack

(3.5 mm)

LANC control jack

Stereo mini jack

(2.5 mm)

TheoMIC

MHH-rHe3do,0,388MB,Hn3Koe

nonhoe conpoTubnene ot 2,5 do

3,0 B noctoHHoro Toka,

BbIXoHoeIIOHoeCOnpoTINBJIeHne

6,8 KOM (Ø 3,5 MM)

CtepeofoHnueckn TIN

BxoBbIXoD V

4-ItbipbKOBbl pa3beM

PomKorOBopntIb

HnHAMK rPOMKOROBOpNTeJI

(0 20 MM)

3KpaH KKD

N306paXeHne

Ppnilaraemble pnpHaJnEkhOCTn

Power adapter

AC input

Power supply requirements

100 - 240 V AC,

50/60 Hz

Power consumption

23 W

Output voltage

Output current: 8.4 V, 1.5 A

in operating mode

Operating temperature

From 0°C to 40°C

Storage temperature

From -20°C to +60°C

Dimensions (approx.)

125 × 39 × 62 MM

(III/B/D), not including

protruding parts

Weight (approx.)

280

without power cord

Cord length (approx.)

Power cord: 2 m

Connecting cord: 1.6 m

Battery block

Output voltage

7.2 V DC

Power

5.0 W-h.

Dimensions (approx.)

38.4 × 20.6 × 70.8 mm (L/B/H)

Weight (approx.)

70 g

Type

Lithium-ion

"Memory Stick"

Memory

Flash memory

4 MB: MSA-4A

Operating voltage

2.7-3.6 V

Power consumption

Approx. 45 mA in operating mode

Approx. 130 uA in standby mode

Dimensions (approx.)

Design and specifications

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

may change without notice.

Prior notice.

- Quick Reference - Identifying the parts and controls

- Quick Reference - Identifying the parts and controls

Camcorder

Video camera

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Video camera - 1

1 INDEX MARK button (p. 89) 2 Zoom ring (p. 30) 3 Focus ring (p. 81) 4 ND FILTER selector (p. 66) 5 FOCUS selector (p. 81) 6 PUSH AUTO button (p. 81) 7 FADER button (p. 55) 8 BACK LIGHT button (p. 32) 9 END SEARCH button (p. 36) 10 EDITSEARCH buttons (p. 36) 11 EXPOSURE dial (p. 63) 12 EXPOSURE button (p. 63) 13 Display window (p. 253) 14 OPEN button (p. 22, 38) 15 SPOT LIGHT button (p. 33)

1 INDEX MARK button (p. 89) 2 Zoom ring (p. 30) 3 Focus ring (p. 81) 4 ND FILTER selector (p. 66) 5 FOCUS selector (p. 81) 6 PUSH AUTO button (p. 81) 7 FADER button (p. 55) 8 BACK LIGHT button (p. 32) 9 END SEARCH button (p. 36) 10 EDITSEARCH buttons (p. 36) 11 EXPOSURE dial (p. 63) 12 EXPOSURE button (p. 63) 13 Display window (p. 253) 14 OPEN button (p. 22, 38) 15 SPOT LIGHT button (p. 33)

Identifying the parts and controls

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Identifying the parts and controls - 1

This mark indicates that this product is a genuine accessory for Sony video products.

When purchasing Sony video products, Sony recommends that you purchase accessories with this "GENUINE VIDEO ACCESSORIES" mark.

Mini Digital Cassette Mini DV Video Cassette Memory

These are trademarks.

Intelligent Accessory Shoe

Notes on the intelligent accessory shoe

  • The intelligent accessory shoe supplies power to optional accessories such as a video light or microphone.
  • The intelligent accessory shoe is linked to the POWER switch, allowing you to turn the power supplied by the shoe on and off. Refer to the operating instructions of the accessory for further information.
  • The intelligent accessory shoe has a safety device for fixing the installed accessory securely. To connect an accessory, press down and push it to the end, and then tighten the screw.
  • To remove an accessory, loosen the screw, and then press down and pull out the accessory.

Identification of controls

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Identification of controls - 1

Intelligent Accessory Shoe

Speaker 17 LCD screen (p. 25) 18 LCD BRIGHT buttons (p. 26) VOLUME buttons (p. 38) 20 MEMORY PLAY button (p. 193) 21 DISPLAY button (p. 39) 22 MEMORY - button (p. 184, 193) 23 DATA CODE button (p. 39) 24 TITLE button (p. 142) 25 (self-timer) button (p. 34, 48, 181)

16 Speaker 17 LCD screen (p. 25) 18 LCD BRIGHT buttons (p. 26) 19 VOLUME buttons (p. 38) 20 MEMORY PLAY button (p. 193) 21 DISPLAY button (p. 39) 22 MEMORY - button (p. 184, 193) 23 DATA CODE button (p. 39) 24 TITLE button (p. 142) 25 (self-timer) button (p. 34, 48, 181)

Identifying the parts and controls

26 Battery pack (p. 13) 27 ZEBRA selector (p. 67) 28 RESET button (p. 221) 29 MEMORY INDEX button (p. 195) 30 MEMORY DELETE button (p. 204) 31 MEMORY + button (p. 184, 193) 32 MEMORY MIX button (p. 184) 33 PICTURE EFFECT button (p. 56) 34 DIGITAL EFFECT button (p. 59)

Identification of controls

26 Battery pack (p. 13) 27 ZEBRA switch (p. 67) 28 RESET button (p. 228) 29 MEMORY INDEX button (p. 195) 30 MEMORY DELETE button (p. 204) 31 MEMORY + button (p. 184, 193) 32 MEMORY MIX button (p. 184) 33 PICTURE EFFECT button (p. 56) 34 DIGITAL EFFECT button (p. 59)

35

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Identification of controls - 1

SLOW (slow playback) • AUDIO DUB (dubbing) STOP (stop) REW (rewind) PLAY (playback) FF (fast-forward) PAUSE (pause) REC (recording)

35 Video control buttons (p. 38, 42, 121) The control buttons light up when you set the POWER switch to VCR. Remote sensor/infrared ray emitter 37 Camera recording lamp (p. 22)

35 Video control buttons (p. 38, 42, 121)

II SLOW (slow motion) AUDIO DUB (audio dubbing) STOP (stop) REW (fast rewind) PLAY (playback) FF (fast forward) II PAUSE (pause) REC (recording)

The control buttons light up when the POWER switch is set to VCR.

Identifying the parts and controls

38 REC START/STOP (p. 27) 39 Lens 40 Lens hood fixing screw 41 Lens hood

You can attach a wide teleconversion lens (not supplied) by removing the lens hood.

Removing the lens hood

To remove the lens hood for attachment of the wide teleconversion lens, etc., loosen the lens hood fixing screw, and unscrew the lens hood counterclockwise.

When using additional filters

We recommend that you use Sony made filters having the genuine accessory mark.

Notes on replacing the eyecup

  • When replacing the supplied eyecup (large or small), clutch the upper and lower of it by your fingers [a], insert your finger into the unfasten portion between the eyecup and viewfinder [b], then remove it.
  • Do not pull the eyecup inward or with excessive force [c]. Doing so may damage the eyecup.

It is recommended to use filters manufactured by Sony, bearing the genuine Sony mark.

Replacing the eyecup

When replacing the eyecup (large or small), hold it with your fingers at its upper and lower parts [a], insert your finger into the gap between the eyecup and the viewfinder [b], then remove it. - Do not pull it inward or apply excessive force [c]. This may damage the eyecup.

[a]SONY DCR-VX2000E - Replacing the eyecup - 1

[b]SONY DCR-VX2000E - Replacing the eyecup - 2

[c]SONY DCR-VX2000E - Replacing the eyecup - 3

Identifying the parts and controls

Identification of parts and controls

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Identification of parts and controls - 1

42 Hooks for shoulder strap 43 Power zoom lever (p. 29) 44 PHOTO button (p. 46, 177) 45 BATT (battery) RELEASE lever (p. 13) 46 PROGRAM AE button (p. 77) 47 AUTO LOCK selector (p. 61) 48 WHT BAL button (p. 70) 49 AUDIO LEVEL button (p. 73) 50 MENU button (p. 154) 51 SEL/PUSH EXEC dial (p. 154) 52 "Memory Stick" slot (p. 173) 53 Cassette lid (p. 20) 54 Hood cap (p. 22) 55 PUSH button (p. 20)

42 Hooks for shoulder strap 43 Power zoom lever (p. 29) 44 PHOTO button (p. 46, 177) 45 BATT RELEASE lever (p. 13) 46 PROGRAM AE button (p. 77) 47 AUTO LOCK selector (p. 61) 48 WHT BAL button (p. 70) 49 AUDIO LEVEL button (p. 73) 50 MENU button (p. 154) 51 SEL/PUSH EXEC dial (p. 154) 52 "Memory Stick" slot (p. 173) 53 Cassette lid (p. 20) 54 Hood cap (p. 22) 55 PUSH button (p. 20)

Identifying the parts and controls

Grip strap 57 LOCK switch (p. 22) 58 POWER switch (p. 22) 59 START/STOP button (p. 22) 60 SHUTTER SPEED button (p. 64) 61 Access lamp (p. 173)

Fastening the grip strap

Identifying the parts and controls

56 Grip strap 57 LOCK switch (p. 22) 58 POWER switch (p. 22) 59 START/STOP button (p. 22) 60 SHUTTER SPEED button (p. 64) 61 Camera recording lamp (p. 173)

Fasten the grip strap firmly.

Attaching the shoulder strap

Attach the shoulder strap supplied with your camcorder to the hooks for the shoulder strap.

Fasten the grip strap firmly.

Attaching the shoulder strap

Spare remote control buttons supplied with your video camera for the remote control mode.

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Attaching the shoulder strap - 1

Identifying the parts and controls

Identifying the parts and controls

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Identifying the parts and controls - 1

62 Carrying handle 63 Remote sensor 64 Camera recording lamp (p. 22) 65 CUSTOM PRESET button (p. 75) 66 Viewfinder adjustment lever (p. 28) 67 Hook for removing the viewfinder (p. 235) 68 EJECT switch (p. 20) 69 DC IN jack (p. 14) 70 Tripod receptacle Make sure that the length of the tripod screw is less than 6.5 mm (9/32 inch). Otherwise, you cannot attach the tripod securely and the screw may damage your camcorder. 71 Intelligent accessory shoe 72 MIC/LINE switch (p. 135)

62 Hook for carrying 63 Power switch 64 Viewfinder lamp (p. 22) 65 CUSTOM PRESET button (p. 75) 66 Viewfinder adjustment knob (p. 28) 67 Viewfinder release knob (p. 235) 68 EJECT switch (p. 20) 69 DC IN jack (p. 14) 70 Power cord jack Make sure that the power cord plug is not longer than 6.5 mm. Otherwise, you will not be able to securely attach the cord, and the plug may damage the camcorder. 71 Accessory shoe 72 MIC/LINE switch (p. 135)

Identifying the parts and controls

73 MIC jack (PLUG IN POWER) (p. 135) The MIC jack is used to supply the power to the "plug-in-power" microphone connected, and is used as an audio input jack for an external microphone or audio equipment. When connecting an external microphone, set the MIC/LINE switch to MIC, and when connecting audio equipment, set it to LINE. 74 Microphone (p. 137) 75 S VIDEO jack (p. 44, 49, 105, 128, 189) 76 VIDEO jack (p. 44, 49, 105, 128, 189) 77 AUDIO L/R jack (p. 44, 105, 128, 135) 78 DV IN/OUT jack (p. 107, 130, 190) This "i.LINK" mark is a trademark of Sony Corporation and indicates that this product is in agreement with IEEE 1394-1995 specifications and their revisions. The DV IN/OUT jack is i.LINK compatible. 79 LANC jack LANC stands for Local Application Control Bus System. The LANC control jack is used for controlling the tape transport of video equipment and peripherals connected to it. This jack has the same function as the jack indicated as CONTROL L or REMOTE. 80 (headphones) jack When you use headphones, the speaker on your camcorder is silent.

The buttons that have the same name on the Remote Commander as on your camcorder function identically to the buttons on your camcorder.

1 Transmitter Point toward the remote sensor to control your camcorder after turning on your camcorder. 2 ZERO SET MEMORY button (p. 91) 3 PHOTO button (p. 46, 177) 4 DISPLAY button (p. 39) 5 Memory control buttons (p. 184, 193) 6 SEARCH MODE button (p. 93, 95, 97, 99) 7 Video control buttons (p. 42) 8 REC button (p. 128)/MARK button (p. 121) 9 DATA CODE button (p. 39) 10 START/STOP button (p. 22) 11 Power zoom button (p. 29) 12 ▲/▶ buttons (p. 93, 95, 97, 99) 13 AUDIO DUB button (p. 138)

1 Point the Remote Commander toward the remote sensor to control your camcorder after turning on your camcorder. 2 ZERO SET MEMORY button (p. 91) 3 PHOTO button (p. 46, 177) 4 DISPLAY button (p. 39) 5 Memory control buttons (p. 184, 193) 6 SEARCH MODE button (p. 93, 95, 97, 99) 7 Video control buttons (p. 42) 8 REC button (p. 128)/MARK button (p. 121) 9 DATA CODE button (p. 39) 10 START/STOP button (p. 22) 11 Power zoom button (p. 29) 12 ▲/▶ buttons (p. 93, 95, 97, 99) 13 AUDIO DUB button (p. 138)

Identifying the parts and controls

To prepare the Remote Commander Insert two R6 (size AA) batteries by matching the + and - polarities on the batteries to the + - marks inside the battery compartment.

Notes on the Remote Commander

  • Point the remote sensor away from strong light sources such as direct sunlight or overhead lighting. Otherwise, the Remote Commander may not function properly.
  • Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3 are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid remote control misoperation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2, we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with black paper.

Display window

Preparing the Remote Commander

Keep the remote sensor away from strong light sources such as direct sunlight or projector lamps. Otherwise, the remote control may not work properly. This camcorder operates in the remote control mode VTR 2. Remote control modes 1, 2 and 3 are used to distinguish this camcorder from other Sony video cassette recorders to prevent incorrect remote control operation. If you use another Sony video cassette recorder operating in mode VTR 2, we recommend changing the remote control mode or covering the sensor of the video cassette recorder with black paper.

Display window

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Display window - 1

1 Remaining battery time indicator (p. 14)/Tape counter (p. 91)/Memory counter (p. 194)/Time code indicator (p. 31)/Self-diagnosis indicator (p. 222) 2 FULL charge indicator (p. 14) 3 Remaining battery indicator (p. 14)

1 Battery charge indicator (p. 14)/Tape counter (p. 91)/Memory counter (p. 194)/Time code indicator (p. 31)/Self-diagnosis indicator (p. 229) 2 FULL charge indicator (p. 14) 3 Remaining charge indicator (p. 14)

Operation indicators

Operation indicators

SONY DCR-VX2000E - Operation indicators - 1

1 Cassette memory indicator (p. 210) 2 Remaining battery time indicator (p. 31) 3 Zoom indicator (p. 29)/Exposure indicator (p. 63)/Data file name indicator (p. 170) 4 Digital effect indicator (p. 58)/FADER indicator (p. 54)/MEMORY MIX indicator (p. 184) 5 16:9WIDE indicator (p. 53)/PROG. SCAN indicator (p. 50) 6 Picture effect indicator (p. 56) 7 ND filter indicator (p. 66) 8 Custom preset indicator (p. 75) 9 Data code indicator (p. 40)

1 INPUT SELECTOR button (p. 210) 2 Remaining battery level indicator (p. 31) 3 TRANSFORMER indicator (p. 29) / EXPOSURE indicator (p. 63) / DATE NAME indicator (p. 170) 4 DIGITAL EFFECT indicator (p. 58) / FADER indicator (p. 54) / MEMORY MIX indicator (p. 184) 5 16:9 WIDE mode indicator (p. 53) / PROG.SCAN indicator (p. 50) 6 IMAGE EFFECT indicator (p. 56) 7 ND FILTER indicator (p. 66) 8 INDIVIDUAL ADJUSTMENT indicator (p. 75) 9 DATA CODE indicator (p. 40)

Identifying the parts and controls

10 LCD bright indicator (p. 26)/Volume indicator (p. 38) 11 Date indicator 12 PROGRAM AE indicator (p. 77) 13 Backlight indicator (p. 32)/Spot light indicator (p. 33) 14 SteadyShot OFF indicator (p. 156) 15 Manual focus/Infinity indicator (p. 81) 16 Recording mode indicator (p. 159) 17 Standby/Recording indicator (p. 22)/Video control mode indicator (p. 42)/Image quality mode indicator (p. 174) 18 Warning indicators (p. 230) 19 Tape counter indicator (p. 91)/Time code indicator (p. 31)/Self-diagnosis indicator (p. 222)/Photo mode indicator (p. 46)/Image number indicator (p. 194) 20 Remaining tape indicator (p. 31)/Memory playback indicator (p. 194) 21 ZERO SET MEMORY indicator (p. 91)/FRAME REC indicator (p. 87)/Interval recording indicator (p. 84) 22 END SEARCH indicator (p. 36) 23 DV IN indicator (p. 131)/A/V→DV OUT indicator 24 Audio mode indicator (p. 159) 25 Data file name indicator This indicator appears when the MEMORY MIX functions work. 26 Audio input level/Time indicator 27 Continuous mode indicator (p. 179) 28 Video flash ready indicator This indicator appears when you use the video flash light (not supplied). 29 Self-timer indicator (p. 34)

Functions to adjust exposure (in the recording mode)

  • In insufficient light

Low lux mode (p. 77)

  • In dark environments such as sunset, fireworks, or general night views

Sunset & moon mode (p. 77)

  • Shooting backlit subjects

BACK LIGHT (p. 32)

  • In spotlight, such as at the theater or a formal event

SPOT LIGHT (p. 33)

Functions to give images more impact (in the recording mode)

  • Smooth transition between scenes

FADER (p. 54)

  • Taking a still picture

PHOTO (p. 46, 177)

  • Digital processing of images

PICTURE EFFECT (p. 56)/DIGITAL

Superimposing a title

EFFECT (p. 58)

TITLE (p. 141)

Functions to give a natural appearance to your recordings (in the recording mode)

  • Preventing deterioration of picture quality in digital zoom

D ZOOM MENU (p. 154)

  • Focusing manually

Manual focus (p. 81)

  • Recording fast-moving subjects

Sports lesson mode (p. 77)

Functions to be used in editing (in the recording mode)

  • Watching the picture on a wide-screen TV

Wide mode (p. 53)

Viewing images using a personal computer

"Memory Stick" (p. 170)

Functions to be used after recording (in the playback mode)

  • Digital processing of recorded images

PICTURE EFFECT (p. 102)/DIGITAL

  • Displaying the date/time or various settings when you recorded

EFFECT (p. 103)

  • Quickly locating a desired scene

Data code (p. 40)

  • Searching for scenes having a title

Zero set memory (p. 91)

  • Searching for scenes recorded in the photo mode

Title search (p. 95)

  • Scanning scenes recorded in the photo mode

Photo search (p. 99)

  • Playing back monaural sound or sub sound

Photo scan (p. 101)

HiFi SOUND MENU (p. 154)

Brief guide to functions

Low light mode (p. 77)

Sunset and moon mode (p. 77)

"Memory Stick" (p. 170)

Camera chromakey 182 Cassette memory 10, 210 Charging battery 14 Charging vanadium-lithium battery 236 COLOUR BAR 161 Connection (dubbing a tape) 105 (viewing on TV) 44 Continuous 178 Custom preset 75 Cut recording 87 Data code 40 Date search 97 Date/time indicator 41 DEMO. 160 DIGITAL EFFECT 58 Digital program editing... 108 DISPLAY 39 DOT 54 Dual sound track tape..... 212 Dubbing a tape 105 DV connecting cable. 106

E

EDITSEARCH 36 END SEARCH 36, 43 Exposure 62 External microphone (not supplied) 251

F, G, H

Fade in/out 54 FADER 54 FLASH MOTION. 58 FOCUS 81 Format 158 Full charge 14

Grip strap 249 Guide frame 52 Headphones jack 251 Heads 235 HiFi SOUND 157

I, J, K, L

i.LINK 251 Image protection 202 Image quality mode 174 INDEX MARK 89 INDEX (Multiple) display 195 Index search 93 "InfoLITHIUM" battery .... 14 Intelligent accessory shoe . 136 Interval recording 83 JPEG 170 Labeling a cassette 149 LANC 251 LCD screen 25 LUMINANCEKEY 58

M, N

Main sound 157 Manual adjustment 61 Manual focus 81 Memory chromakey 182 Memory luminancekey..... 182 Memory mix 182 Memory overlap 182 Memory photo recording . 177 "Memory Stick" 170 Menu settings 154 MIC (PLUG IN POWER) .. 135 Mirror mode 25 Moisture condensation .... 234 MONOTONE 54 ND filter 65 Normal charge 14

O, P, Q

OLD MOVIE 58 Operation indicators 254 OVERLAP 54 PAL system 233 Photo scan 101 Photo search 99 PICTURE EFFECT 56 Picture search 42 Playback pause 42 Power sources

(battery pack) 13 (car battery) 19 (mains) 18

Power zoom. 29

Printmark. 208 PROGRAMAE. 77

Progressive 50

R, S

Rec Review 37 Recording level 73 Remaining battery time indicator 31 Remaining tape indicator ... 31 Remote Commander 252 Remote control jack (LANC) 251 Remote sensor 246 RESET 221 SVIDEO jack.....45,105,128 SEL/PUSH EXEC dial .... 154 Self-diagnosis display .... 222 Self-timer. 34, 48, 181 Serial port adaptor 197 Skip scan 42 Slide show 200 Slow playback 42 Spotlight mode 33 STEADYSHOT 156 Stereo tape 212 STILL 58 Sub sound 157

T, U, V

Tape counter 91 Tape photo recording 46 Telephoto 29 Time code 31 Title 141 Title search 95 TRAIL 58 Transition 24 TV colour system 233

W,X,Y,Z

Warning indicators 230 White balance 70 Wide mode 53 Wide-angle 29 WIPE 54 WORLD TIME 160 Write-protect tab 21 Zebra pattern 67 Zero set memory function .. 91 Zoom 29

Alphabetical index

A,B,C,D

Battery pack 197

Audio dubbing 135

Audio modes 165

White balance 70

Battery pack InfoLITHIUM .14

Battery pack 13

Video heads 235

External microphone (not supplied) 251

Audio dubbing 163

S VIDEO jack 45,105,128

LANC remote control jack 251

The 3D image of the device 251

d,3

Pause of reproduction..42

Cutting of tapes 105

Transition 24

Printing of signs 208

Search of dates 97

Search of images 42

Search by method of run ... 42

Search by index 93

Search of titles 95

Frame-by-frame shooting 87

Full charge 14

Striped template 67

Preventive indicators 230

Contents 50

Viewing records 37

Remote control operation 252

Working indicators 254

Adjusting the viewfinder 28

Image quality mode 174

Spotlight mode

Illumination 33

Manufacturer: Sony Corporation

Address: 6-7-35 Kitashinagawa,

Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 141-0001, Japan

Country of origin: Japan

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : SONY

Model : DCR-VX2000E

Category : Camcorder